Docucentre Sc2022: User Guide

DocuCentre SC2022
User Guide
Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Internet Explorer, Microsoft, Microsoft Edge, OneDrive, SharePoint, Windows, and Windows Server are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, Mac, macOS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
AirPrint and AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Android, Google, Google Chrome, Google Cloud Print, Google Drive, and Google Play are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and follow the instructions before
performing the required procedures.
As the copying machine contains a feature designed to prevent forging of certain documents, there may be rare
instances where copies do not achieve the desired results.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or computer hacking.
Important
1 This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied or
modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
2 Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
3 We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
4 Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual. Unauthorized operation
can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized operation of the
equipment.
5 An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.
Xerox, Xerox and Design, Fuji Xerox and Design, as well as CentreWare are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Xerox Corporation in Japan and/or other countries.
DocuWorks is a registered trademark or trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
2 User Guide
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the DocuCentre SC2022 (mentioned as "the machine" hereafter).
The procedures and precautions for operating the machine are written in this instruction guide. Please read this
manual thoroughly to achieve the best performance from this machine.
This manual assumes you are familiar with computers and the basics of network operation and configuration.
For the basic information or operations about your computer or the network environment, see the manual
provided with the computer, operating system, or network system.
After reading this manual, keep it safe and handy for future reference. You can read it again if you do not
understand any operations or if the machine malfunctions.
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
3
Contents
Preface............................................................................................................................................................................................3
1 Before Beginning.................................................................................................. 10
1.1 Types of Manuals..............................................................................................................................................................11
1.1.1 Manuals Included With the Machine....................................................................................................................... 11
1.1.2 Manuals Included With Optional Accessories ...................................................................................................... 11
1.2 About This Manual...........................................................................................................................................................12
1.2.1 Organization....................................................................................................................................................................... 12
1.2.2 Conventions ........................................................................................................................................................................ 12
1.3 Features of the Machine ................................................................................................................................................14
1.4 Machine Overview ............................................................................................................................................................17
1.4.1 Front, Left Side, Right Side, Rear, and Internal View.......................................................................................... 17
1.4.2 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) ....................................................................................................... 19
1.4.3 Operator Panel................................................................................................................................................................... 19
1.5 Graphic Symbols on the Machine and Their Meanings ....................................................................................21
2 Setting Up the Machine..................................................................................... 22

2.1 Turning On/Off the Machine........................................................................................................................................23
2.1.1 Turning On the Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 23
2.1.2 Turning Off the Machine ............................................................................................................................................... 23
2.2 Connecting Your Machine to a Computer...............................................................................................................24
2.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.2.2 Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network ........................................................................................................... 25
2.2.3 Connecting to a Computer With USB....................................................................................................................... 26
2.2.4 Connecting to a Wireless Network............................................................................................................................. 26
2.2.5 Setting the IP Address .................................................................................................................................................... 30
2.2.6 Installing Software for Windows® ............................................................................................................................. 33
2.2.7 Installing Software for Mac.......................................................................................................................................... 35
2.2.8 Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) ........................................................................................... 45
3 Using Your Machine ............................................................................................ 46

3.1 Using the Operator Panel ..............................................................................................................................................47
3.1.1 About the Home Screen................................................................................................................................................. 47
3.1.2 Basic Operations on the Touch Panel ....................................................................................................................... 49
3.1.3 Customizing the Home Screen .................................................................................................................................... 50
3.1.4 Entering Characters ......................................................................................................................................................... 54
3.1.5 Restricting the Touch Panel Operation..................................................................................................................... 54
3.1.6 Restricting Usage of Functions on Each User........................................................................................................ 58
3.2 Power Saver Mode ............................................................................................................................................................59
3.2.1 Entering the Power Saver Mode.................................................................................................................................. 59
3.2.2 Phases of the Power Saver Mode ............................................................................................................................... 59
3.2.3 Changing the Elapsed Time Before the Machine Enters the Power Saver Mode ................................... 59
3.2.4 Recovering From the Power Saver Mode ................................................................................................................. 60
3.3 Checking Jobs.....................................................................................................................................................................61
3.3.1 Checking the Job Status................................................................................................................................................. 61
3.3.2 Canceling the Pending Jobs.......................................................................................................................................... 61
3.3.3 Printing/Deleting Jobs Stored in the Machine ...................................................................................................... 62
3.4 Print Media Guidelines....................................................................................................................................................63
3.4.1 Print Media That We Recommend............................................................................................................................. 63
3.4.2 Usable Paper Weight and Paper Amount on Each Tray.................................................................................... 63
3.4.3 Usable Print Media on Each Tray ............................................................................................................................... 63
3.4.4 Storing and Handling Print Media ............................................................................................................................. 66
4 User Guide
3.5 Loading Print Media ........................................................................................................................................................67
3.5.1 Loading Print Media in Tray 1 and Tray 2............................................................................................................... 67
3.5.2 Loading Print Media in Tray 5 (Bypass) ................................................................................................................... 69
3.5.3 Loading Envelopes ........................................................................................................................................................... 72
3.6 Loading a Document.......................................................................................................................................................74
3.6.1 Loading a Document on the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)............................................. 74
3.6.2 Loading a Document on the Document Glass...................................................................................................... 76
4 Printing.................................................................................................................... 77
4.1 Printing From a Computer.............................................................................................................................................78
4.1.1 For Windows® .................................................................................................................................................................... 78
4.1.2 For Mac ................................................................................................................................................................................. 79
4.2 Canceling a Print Job.......................................................................................................................................................81
4.2.1 Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel .............................................................................................................. 81
4.2.2 Canceling a Job From a Computer ............................................................................................................................ 81
4.3 Printing Color Jobs in Black and White ....................................................................................................................82
4.4 Using Stored Print (Windows®) ..................................................................................................................................83
4.4.1 Secure Print ......................................................................................................................................................................... 83
4.4.2 Sample Set .......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
4.5 Printing a File in a USB Flash Drive (USB Direct Print) (Optional).................................................................86
4.5.1 Supported USB Flash Drive and File Formats........................................................................................................ 86
4.5.2 Printing a File in a USB Flash Drive............................................................................................................................ 86
4.6 Printing on Envelopes......................................................................................................................................................97
5 Copying .................................................................................................................100
5.1 Making a Copy ................................................................................................................................................................ 101
5.1.1 Basic Copying...................................................................................................................................................................101
5.1.2 Various Copy Features ..................................................................................................................................................103
5.2 Making ID Card Copies................................................................................................................................................ 110
5.2.1 Basic ID Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................................110
5.2.2 Various ID Card Copy Features .................................................................................................................................112
6 Scanning ...............................................................................................................117
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 118
6.2 Scanning Using the Operator Panel of the Machine....................................................................................... 119
6.2.1 Storing Scanned Data to a Computer ....................................................................................................................119
6.2.2 Sending Scanned Data via E-Mail (Scan to Email) ...........................................................................................134
6.2.3 Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive (Scan to USB Drive) (Optional).........................................144
6.3 Scanning From a Computer....................................................................................................................................... 152
6.3.1 For Windows® ..................................................................................................................................................................152
6.3.2 For Mac ...............................................................................................................................................................................160
7 Faxing (Optional) ...............................................................................................161

7.1 Sending/Receiving a Fax ............................................................................................................................................. 162
7.1.1 Sending a Fax...................................................................................................................................................................162
7.1.2 Receiving a Fax ................................................................................................................................................................166
7.1.3 Various Fax Features......................................................................................................................................................171
7.2 Sending a Fax From a Computer (Direct Fax) .................................................................................................... 176
8 Using the Cloud Service Hub ..........................................................................179

8.1 Connecting to the Cloud Service Hub.................................................................................................................... 180
8.1.1 Registering User Account ............................................................................................................................................180
8.1.2 Logging In to the Cloud Service Hub......................................................................................................................180
8.2 Using the Cloud Service Hub..................................................................................................................................... 182
8.2.1 Printing From the Cloud Service Hub (Print from Cloud) ................................................................................182
Contents 5
8.2.2 Saving Scanned Data in a Cloud Storage Service (Scan to Cloud).............................................................186
8.2.3 Sending Scanned Data to an E-mail Address (Scan to Me) ..........................................................................192
8.3 Accessing the Cloud Service Hub From the Print & Scan Hub (Windows®) ........................................... 199
8.3.1 Displaying the Cloud Service Hub Screen .............................................................................................................199
9 Printing and Scanning From Smartphones or Tablets ...........................200

9.1 Connecting the Machine to Smartphones/Tablets .......................................................................................... 201
9.1.1 Via Wireless Network ....................................................................................................................................................201
9.1.2 Via Wi-Fi Direct................................................................................................................................................................201
9.2 Printing and Scanning Using Print Utility ............................................................................................................ 206
9.3 Using Other Print Services .......................................................................................................................................... 207
9.3.1 AirPrint ................................................................................................................................................................................207
9.3.2 Google Cloud Print .........................................................................................................................................................208
9.3.3 Mopria® Print Service ...................................................................................................................................................211
10 Changing the Machine Settings....................................................................214

10.1 Understanding the Machine Setting Menus ...................................................................................................... 215
10.2 [Language] ....................................................................................................................................................................... 227
10.3 [About] ............................................................................................................................................................................... 228
10.4 [Information Pages]...................................................................................................................................................... 229
10.4.1 Printing Information Pages ........................................................................................................................................230
10.5 [Trays]................................................................................................................................................................................. 231
10.5.1 [Bypass Tray] ....................................................................................................................................................................231
10.5.2 [Tray 1]................................................................................................................................................................................231
10.5.3 [Tray 2]................................................................................................................................................................................232
10.5.4 [Tray Priority] ....................................................................................................................................................................232
10.6 [Supplies]........................................................................................................................................................................... 233
10.7 [Billing Meters]................................................................................................................................................................ 234
10.8 [General]............................................................................................................................................................................ 235
10.8.1 [Date & Time]...................................................................................................................................................................235
10.8.2 [Display Brightness].......................................................................................................................................................235
10.8.3 [Sounds]..............................................................................................................................................................................235
10.8.4 [NFC]....................................................................................................................................................................................236
10.8.5 [Status LED (Blue)] .........................................................................................................................................................237
10.8.6 [Power Saver]....................................................................................................................................................................237
10.8.7 [Timers]...............................................................................................................................................................................237
10.8.8 [Units]..................................................................................................................................................................................237
10.8.9 [Original Size Detected] ...............................................................................................................................................237
10.8.10 [Check Document Guide] ............................................................................................................................................238
10.8.11 [Default Paper Size] .......................................................................................................................................................238
10.8.12 [Fax Settings]....................................................................................................................................................................238
10.8.13 [Email Settings] ...............................................................................................................................................................242
10.9 [Network Settings]......................................................................................................................................................... 243
10.9.1 [Wi-Fi] ..................................................................................................................................................................................243
10.9.2 [Wi-Fi Direct].....................................................................................................................................................................245
10.9.3 [Ethernet]...........................................................................................................................................................................246
10.9.4 [Protocol]............................................................................................................................................................................247
10.9.5 [Other].................................................................................................................................................................................247
10.10 [App Defaults] ................................................................................................................................................................. 249
10.10.1 [Copy Settings] ................................................................................................................................................................249
10.10.2 [Fax Settings]....................................................................................................................................................................251
10.10.3 [Scan Settings].................................................................................................................................................................251
10.10.4 [Direct Print Settings]....................................................................................................................................................253
10.11 [Security Settings] ......................................................................................................................................................... 255
6 User Guide
10.11.1 [Panel Lock] .......................................................................................................................................................................255
10.11.2 [Service Lock]....................................................................................................................................................................256
10.11.3 [User Authentication] ...................................................................................................................................................257
10.11.4 [Secure Fax Receive] ......................................................................................................................................................257
10.11.5 [Copy Accounting]..........................................................................................................................................................258
10.11.6 [Print Accounting]...........................................................................................................................................................258
10.11.7 [Edit Email From Field] .................................................................................................................................................259
10.11.8 [Confirm Recipients] ......................................................................................................................................................259
10.11.9 [Domain Filtering] ..........................................................................................................................................................259
10.11.10 [Software Download]....................................................................................................................................................259
10.11.11 [Login Attempts].............................................................................................................................................................259
10.11.12 [Security Warning]..........................................................................................................................................................259
10.12 [Maintenance]................................................................................................................................................................. 260
10.12.1 [Adjust Paper Type]........................................................................................................................................................260
10.12.2 [Adjust Transfer Belt Unit]...........................................................................................................................................260
10.12.3 [Adjust 2nd BTR] .............................................................................................................................................................260
10.12.4 [Image Position]..............................................................................................................................................................260
10.12.5 [Adjust Color Registration]..........................................................................................................................................261
10.12.6 [Quick Density Adjust] ..................................................................................................................................................261
10.12.7 [Calibration] ......................................................................................................................................................................261
10.12.8 [Initialize NVM] ...............................................................................................................................................................261
10.12.9 [Initialize Print Meter]...................................................................................................................................................262
10.12.10 [Clear Stored Jobs] .........................................................................................................................................................262
10.12.11 [Non-Genuine Toner].....................................................................................................................................................262
10.12.12 [Adjust Altitude]..............................................................................................................................................................262
10.12.13 [Delete Job History] .......................................................................................................................................................262
10.13 [Advanced Settings] ..................................................................................................................................................... 263
10.13.1 [PCL Settings] ...................................................................................................................................................................263
10.13.2 [PDF Settings] ..................................................................................................................................................................265
10.13.3 [USB Port Settings].........................................................................................................................................................266
10.13.4 [Copy Settings] ................................................................................................................................................................266
10.13.5 [Scan Settings].................................................................................................................................................................266
10.13.6 [Output Settings] ............................................................................................................................................................266
10.13.7 [Low Toner Alert Message]..........................................................................................................................................268
10.13.8 [End of Drum Life] ..........................................................................................................................................................268
10.13.9 [Job History]......................................................................................................................................................................268
10.13.10 [LDAP Address Book] .....................................................................................................................................................268
10.13.11 [Optional Apps]................................................................................................................................................................269
11 Making Better Use of Your Machine............................................................270

11.1 Using CentreWare Internet Services ...................................................................................................................... 271
11.1.1 Setting Up Your Web Browser....................................................................................................................................272
11.1.2 Starting CentreWare Internet Services ..................................................................................................................273
11.1.3 Security of CentreWare Internet Services.............................................................................................................273
11.2 Using Software Supplied With the Machine....................................................................................................... 274
11.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................................274
11.2.2 Updating Software ........................................................................................................................................................278
11.3 Using the Address Book .............................................................................................................................................. 279
11.3.1 Registering Destinations/Groups in the Address Book ....................................................................................279
11.3.2 Specifying Destinations From the Address Book ...............................................................................................281
11.3.3 Editing/Deleting Destinations in the Address Book..........................................................................................281
11.3.4 Using the Address Book in an LDAP Server ..........................................................................................................284
11.4 Using Print Accounting................................................................................................................................................ 290
11.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................................290
Contents 7
11.4.2 Permitting Only Registered Users to Print.............................................................................................................291
11.4.3 Setting Printing Restrictions on Each Registered User.....................................................................................295
11.4.4 Permitting Print Jobs Without Account Information .......................................................................................307
11.4.5 Checking Printing Usage..............................................................................................................................................309
11.5 Using Copy Accounting ............................................................................................................................................... 310
11.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................................310
11.5.2 Permitting Only Registered Users to Copy............................................................................................................311
11.5.3 Setting Copying Restrictions on Each Registered User....................................................................................313
11.5.4 Using Copy Accounting................................................................................................................................................322
11.5.5 Checking Copying Usage.............................................................................................................................................323
11.6 Using the User Authentication Feature ................................................................................................................ 324
11.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................................324
11.6.2 Configuring the User Authentication Feature Settings...................................................................................325
11.6.3 Using the User Authentication Feature.................................................................................................................332
11.7 Using the Encryption Feature ................................................................................................................................... 334
11.7.1 Preparing for Encryption ..............................................................................................................................................334
11.7.2 Setting the Encryption Features ...............................................................................................................................341
12 Maintenance........................................................................................................346
12.1 Replacing Consumables .............................................................................................................................................. 347
12.1.1 Replacing the Toner Cartridges .................................................................................................................................347
12.1.2 Replacing the Drum Cartridges.................................................................................................................................349
12.1.3 Replacing the Waste Toner Container ....................................................................................................................350
12.2 Cleaning the Machine.................................................................................................................................................. 354
12.2.1 Cleaning Outside the Machine..................................................................................................................................354
12.2.2 Cleaning the Touch Panel............................................................................................................................................355
12.2.3 Cleaning Inside the Machine.....................................................................................................................................355
12.2.4 Clean the Document Glass Cover, Document Glass, Document Presser, and Narrow
Glass Strip ..........................................................................................................................................................................358
12.2.5 Cleaning the Feed Rollers of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) ...................................359
12.3 Counting up the Number of Printed Pages ......................................................................................................... 361
12.3.1 Checking by Meter .........................................................................................................................................................361
12.3.2 Checking by User or Paper Size .................................................................................................................................361
13 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................363
13.1 Clearing Jams .................................................................................................................................................................. 364
13.1.1 Clearing Documents ......................................................................................................................................................364
13.1.2 Clearing Paper Jams ......................................................................................................................................................366
13.2 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................................. 370
13.2.1 Menu Setting Problems ................................................................................................................................................370
13.2.2 Machine Problems ..........................................................................................................................................................370
13.2.3 Print Quality Problems ..................................................................................................................................................373
13.2.4 Copy Problems .................................................................................................................................................................379
13.2.5 Printing Problems............................................................................................................................................................381
13.2.6 Fax Problems.....................................................................................................................................................................383
13.2.7 Scanning Problems.........................................................................................................................................................385
13.2.8 Wireless Problems...........................................................................................................................................................386
13.2.9 Wi-Fi Direct Problems....................................................................................................................................................387
13.2.10 IPv6 Environment Problems .......................................................................................................................................388
13.2.11 Scanner Driver/Software Problems..........................................................................................................................388
13.3 Understanding Machine Messages ........................................................................................................................ 389
Appendix.........................................................................................................................395
Specifications............................................................................................................................................................................... 396
8 User Guide
Basic Specifications/Copy Function............................................................................................................................................396
Print Function.......................................................................................................................................................................................398
Scan Function ......................................................................................................................................................................................399
Fax Function (Optional)...................................................................................................................................................................401
Direct Fax Function (Optional)......................................................................................................................................................402
Duplex Function..................................................................................................................................................................................402
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder.........................................................................................................................................402
Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional).........................................................................................................................................403
Optional Accessories ................................................................................................................................................................. 404
About Supplies............................................................................................................................................................................. 405
Life of Consumables..........................................................................................................................................................................405
Collection and Recycling of Consumables................................................................................................................................405
Attaching/Removing the Optional Wireless LAN Kit .................................................................................................... 406
Attaching the Optional Wireless LAN Kit..................................................................................................................................406
Removing the Optional Wireless LAN Kit .................................................................................................................................407
"Software/Product Manual" Disc .......................................................................................................................................... 408
Resetting Defaults...................................................................................................................................................................... 409
New Zealand FAX modem statements .............................................................................................................................. 411
Contents 9
1 Before Beginning
1.1 Types of Manuals .....................................................................................................11

1.2 About This Manual ..................................................................................................12
1.3 Features of the Machine........................................................................................14
1.4 Machine Overview....................................................................................................17
1.5 Graphic Symbols on the Machine and Their Meanings ............................21
10 User Guide
1.1 Types of Manuals
1.1.1 Manuals Included With the Machine
Basic Operation Guide
Describes step-by-step instructions on how to operate the machine, information you need to know before using
the machine, and how to operate the machine safely.
User Guide (this manual) ("Software/Product Manual" disc)
Describes how to get ready to print, copy, fax, and scan as well as set various features. It also covers the operator
panel menus, troubleshooting tips, and maintenance information.
1.1.2 Manuals Included With Optional Accessories

Optional accessories are available for this product. Optional accessories come with an installation guide that
provides procedures to set up the product.
1 Before Beginning 11
1.2 About This Manual
Describes how to operate the print, copy, scan, and fax functions. It also covers the operator panel menus,
troubleshooting tips, and maintenance information.
Note
• In this manual, the procedures for the computer are explained using Microsoft® Windows® 7 and macOS 10.12 unless
stated otherwise.
1.2.1 Organization
This manual is organized into the following chapters:
1 Before Beginning (P.10)
Describes the basic information about the machine before operating features.
2 Setting Up the Machine (P.22)
Describes how to connect the machine to your computer and network, and how to install the software on your
computer.
3 Using Your Machine (P.46)
Describes information about screens on the machine, supported paper, and how to load paper and documents.
4 Printing (P.77)
Describes the instructions for basic print operations and various features of the print function.
5 Copying (P.100)
Describes the instructions for basic copy operations and various features of the copy function.
6 Scanning (P.117)
Describes the instructions for basic scan operations and various features of the scan function.
7 Faxing (Optional) (P.161)
Describes the instructions for basic fax operations and various features of the fax function.
8 Using the Cloud Service Hub (P.179)
Describes how to connect the machine to the Cloud Service Hub and how to use the Cloud Service Hub function.
9 Printing and Scanning From Smartphones or Tablets (P.200)
Describes how to connect mobile devices to the machine, or how to print or scan from a mobile device.
10 Changing the Machine Settings (P.214)
Describes the machine setting menus.
11 Making Better Use of Your Machine (P.270)
Describes information about software included with the machine and advanced features.
12 Maintenance (P.346)
Describes how to maintain the machine such as cleaning the machine.
13 Troubleshooting (P.363)
Describes the troubleshooting tips for machine problems.
Appendix (P.395)
Describes the machine specifications and support information.
1.2.2 Conventions
– In this manual, "computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
– Please note that the screenshots shown in this manual apply to a fully configured machine and therefore
may not exactly represent the configuration being used.
12 User Guide
– This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important information you have to know or be reminded before

Important operations.
Indicates supplemental information useful for operations.

Note
Indicates reference sections or documents.

Refer
" " • A cross-reference included in this manual.

• Names of DVD-ROM, operator panel messages, and input text.
XXXXX Manual Indicates the names of the reference manuals.
[ ] • Buttons or menus displayed on the operator panel screen.
• Buttons, menus, folders, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the
computer screen.
< > Indicates hardware buttons on the operator panel.
> Indicates an abbreviated process flow on the operator panel or the
computer.
– Orientation of documents or paper is described in this manual as follows:

, , LEF Orientation: Loading documents or paper in portrait orientation.
, , SEF Orientation: Loading documents or paper in landscape orientation.
LEF Orientation SEF Orientation
Feed direction Feed direction
1.3 Features of the Machine
This section describes the useful features available on the machine.
Customizing the Home Screen

Creating a New Tile P.52
You can create the tiles registered with the job settings that you often use, and then save it on the [Home]
screen.
Copying
Fitting Two Pages of a Document Onto a Single Page ([2-Up]) P.106
You can copy two pages of a document to fit onto one side of a sheet of paper.
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card ([ID Card Copy]) P.110

You can copy both sides of an ID card onto one side of a sheet of paper.
Scanning
Sending a Scanned Document to a Computer ([Scan to Network]) P.119
You can store a scanned document in a computer on a network.
Scanning Using Print & Scan Hub P.152
You can scan documents using the Print & Scan Hub program of the printer.
14 User Guide
Sending a Scanned Document via E-Mail ([Scan to Email]) P.134
You can send a scanned document as an e-mail attachment.
Storing a Scanned Document to a USB Flash Drive ([Scan to USB Drive]) (Optional) P.144
You can save a scanned document to a USB flash drive.
Faxing
Faxing From the Machine P.162
You can send or receive faxes by using the operator panel of the machine.
Sending a Fax From a Windows® Computer (Direct Fax) P.176

You can send a fax from your computer at your desk. This feature enables you to fax a document without
printing it out, helping you save paper.
Printing Faxes Received Using the Secure Receiving Mode P.168

You can configure the machine settings so that the received faxes cannot be browsed by other people.
Receiving Faxes Without Printing ([Forward Settings]) P.240
You can forward incoming faxes to a specified e-mail address or server. Faxes are not printed so it saves
resources and reduces the risk of an information leakage.
Printing
Printing a Confidential Document ([Secure Print]) P.83
Store the print data in the machine with your user ID and passcode specified. You can later start printing when
you are at the machine.
Printing From Smartphones or Tablets P.201

You can print documents, photos, web pages, or e-mails from your smartphone or tablet.
Accounting
Managing the Number of Printouts P.290
You can count how much each user copied and printed, or set copying and printing restrictions on each user.
16 User Guide
1.4 Machine Overview
1.4.1 Front, Left Side, Right Side, Rear, and Internal
View
Front and Left Side View
3
12
4
11
5
6
10
7
9
8
1 Document Glass Cover 7 Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional)

2 Document Glass 8 Stand (Cabinet) (Optional)
3 Operator Panel 9 Left Side Cover [B]
4 Output Tray 10 Tray 5 (Bypass)
5 Front Cover 11 Front USB Port (Optional)
6 Tray 1 (Standard Tray) 12 Left Side Cover [A]
Right Side and Rear View
1
2
5 3
4
1 USB Port 4 Wall Jack Connector

2 Ethernet Port 5 Power Cord Connector
3 Phone Connector 6 Wireless LAN Kit (Optional)
Note
• Phone connector and wall jack connector are available only on the model with the fax function.
Internal View
4
2
1 Toner Cartridges 3 Waste Toner Container

2 Drum Cartridges 4 Fusing Unit
Important
• Do not touch as it is hot.
18 User Guide
1.4.2 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
1 2 3 4
7
5
6
8
1 Document Feeder Top Cover 5 Document Stopper

2 Inner Cover 6 Document Output Tray
3 Document Guides 7 Document Presser
4 Document Feeder Tray 8 Narrow Glass Strip
1.4.3 Operator Panel
2
6 3
1 Touch Panel Configures the settings by directly tapping the screen.

Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
2 <Home> button Moves to the [Home] screen.
3 <Power> button • Turns on/off the machine.
• Switches the machine between two modes: standby and power saver.
Blinks slowly when the machine is in the power saver mode.
Refer
• For details about how to turn on/off the machine, see "Turning
On/Off the Machine (P.23)."
• For details about the power saver mode, see "Power Saver Mode
(P.59)."
4 Data LED • Blinks when faxes are being sent or received.
• Lights up when data is stored in the memory.
5 Status LED • Blinks in blue when the machine is turned on, a job is completed, the
machine receives an identification signal from a mobile device, an
authentication is completed successfully, or when an error is cleared.
• Blinks in orange when an error occurs.
6 <NFC> Starts communication between the machine and a mobile device with the
NFC function when the device is waved over this mark.
20 User Guide
1.5 Graphic Symbols on the Machine
and Their Meanings
Refer to the following table for the product symbol and their definitions.
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
WARNING or CAUTION:
Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death. Do not load punch paper in these orientations.
To avoid personal injury, use caution.
To avoid property damage, use caution.
WARNING: Punch Paper.

Hot surface on or in the printer. Use caution to avoid personal
injury.
WARNING: Supply Paper.
Moving parts. To avoid personal injury, use caution.
Do not touch. Load Paper Face-up.
Do not unscrew or perform maintenance tasks on the unit. Load Paper Face-down.
Do not burn the toner unit. Indicates how to load Pointed Envelopes into the Bypass tray.
Do not burn the waste toner container. Indicates how to feed Pocket Envelopes into the Bypass tray.
CAUTION: Pinch Point Maximum Fill Line
Standby Button Add Paper.
Home Button Push down Bottom Plate.
NFC Point Paper Jam
Do not copy money. Do not remove forcefully.
Do not use paper with staples or clips attached. Ethernet
Do not use folded, creased or torn paper. USB
Do not use inkjet paper. Phone connector
Do not use postcards. Line connector
Do not use lightweight originals. Toner
Do not use originals that have been cut and pasted together. Cleaning Wand Location
Do not use creased or folded originals. Remove
Do not use originals with excessive curl. Lock
Do not use carbon paper originals. Unlock
Do not use envelopes.
2 Setting Up the Machine
2.1 Turning On/Off the Machine................................................................................23

2.2 Connecting Your Machine to a Computer ......................................................24
22 User Guide
2.1 Turning On/Off the Machine
2.1.1 Turning On the Machine
1. Press the <Power> button.
2.1.2 Turning Off the Machine

Important
• The print data and stored data in the memory is cleared when the machine is turned off.
1. Press the <Power> button.
2. Tap [Power Off] on the touch panel.
Note
• Pressing and holding the <Power> button for 3 or more seconds will also turn off the machine.
2 Setting Up the Machine 23

2.2 Connecting Your Machine to a
Computer
2.2.1 Overview
The machine supports wired LAN, USB, and wireless LAN connection. The following procedures are
recommended for the connections.
Note
• Wired LAN connection and wireless LAN connection cannot be used simultaneously. If you connect the machine to a
wireless network, disconnect the Ethernet cable from the machine.
Wired LAN or USB connection
Preparation
Connect an Ethernet cable or a USB cable to the machine. If you connect an Ethernet cable, specify the IP address.
"Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network (P.25)"

"Connecting to a Computer With USB (P.26)"
Windows® Mac
Install software. Install software.
"Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)" "Installing Software for Mac (P.35)"
24 User Guide
Wireless LAN connection
Preparation
Install the optional Wireless LAN Kit, and then remove the Ethernet cable.
"Attaching the Optional Wireless LAN Kit (P.406)"
Windows® Mac
Connect the machine to a wireless network, and then Connect the machine to a wireless network, and then
install software. install software.
"Automatically Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.26)" "Automatically Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.26)"
"Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.28)" "Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.28)"
"Connecting Using [Quick Setup] (Windows®) (P.29)"
"Connecting Using Support Tools (Windows®) (P.29)"
"Installing Software for Mac (P.35)"
"Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)"
2.2.2 Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network

1. Connect the machine to the Ethernet outlet or hub with the Ethernet cable.
Ethernet outlet/hub
2. Set the IP address for the machine.

Refer
• For details about how to set the IP address, see "Setting the IP Address (P.30)."
Next, install software.
Refer
• For details about installing software on a Windows® computer, see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)", and for
details about installing software on a Mac, see "Installing Software for Mac (P.35)."

2.2.3 Connecting to a Computer With USB
With the machine turned off, connect the machine and your computer with the USB cable.
Important
• Do not connect the machine to a USB hub.
Next, install software.

Refer
• For details about installing software on a Windows® computer, see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)", and for
details about installing software on a Mac, see "Installing Software for Mac (P.35)."
2.2.4 Connecting to a Wireless Network

Preparing to Use a Wireless Network
Perform the following procedures before configuring the wireless settings.
1. Make sure that the optional Wireless LAN Kit is connected to the machine.
Refer
• For details, see "Attaching the Optional Wireless LAN Kit (P.406)."
2. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is disconnected from the machine. If the Ethernet cable is
connected to the machine, disconnect it, turn off the machine, and then turn it on again.
You can configure the settings for wireless LAN connection as follows.
• Connecting automatically from the operator panel
"Automatically Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.26)"
• Connecting manually from the operator panel
"Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.28)"
• Connecting using [Quick Setup] in the "Software/Product Manual" disc
"Connecting Using [Quick Setup] (Windows®) (P.29)"
• Connecting using the Support Tools in the "Software/Product Manual" disc
"Connecting Using Support Tools (Windows®) (P.29)"
Automatically Connecting to a Wireless Network

This machine supports wireless LAN connection using WPS (push button method) and WPS (PIN code method).
For WPS (push button method), configure the setting on the operator panel, and then press the WPS button on
your access point or wireless router.
For WPS (PIN code method), enter the PIN code assigned to the machine into the access point or wireless router.
26 User Guide
These methods are available only when the access point or wireless router supports WPS.
Refer
• For details about the WPS operation on the access point or wireless router, see the manual supplied with the access point
or wireless router.
 When Connecting With WPS (push button method)

1. Press the <Home> button.
2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [WPS].

4. When the message "Push WPS button on wireless router." is displayed, press the WPS button on the
access point or wireless router within 2 minutes.
When connection to an access point or wireless router is complete, the machine will restart automatically.
 When Connecting With WPS (PIN code method)

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi] > [WPS].

4. Tap [Connect via PIN].
Note
• Write down the eight-digit PIN code displayed on the touch panel.
5. When the message "PIN: XXXX Operate wireless router." is displayed, enter the PIN code into the
access point or wireless router.
When connection to an access point or wireless router is complete, the machine will restart automatically.
Refer
• For details about how to enter the PIN code, see the manual supplied with the access point or wireless router.

Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network
Connect to a wireless network by selecting your access point or wireless router from the list or by specifying the
SSID.
Note
• You need the SSID and the WEP key or passphrase of the access point or wireless router. For details, see the manual
supplied with the access point or wireless router.
 When Connecting by Selecting an Access Point or Wireless Router

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi].

4. Tap [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard].
5. Tap the desired access point or wireless router.
Note
• If the desired access point or wireless router does not appear, enter the SSID manually. For details, see "When
Connecting by Entering the SSID Manually (P.28)."
6. Enter the WEP or passphrase, and then tap [Next].
 When Connecting by Entering the SSID Manually
2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi].

4. Tap [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard].
5. Tap [Enter SSID].
6. Enter the SSID, and then tap [Next].
7. Select [Infrastructure] or [Ad hoc] according to your environment.
Note
• When [Wi-Fi Direct] is enabled, you cannot select [Ad hoc].
28 User Guide
8. Specify the encryption type.
9. Tap [Next].
10. Enter the WEP key or passphrase as necessary, and then tap [Next].
Connecting Using [Quick Setup] (Windows®)

You can easily connect the machine to a wireless network using [Quick Setup] in the "Software/Product Manual"
disc. If you use [Quick Setup], you can connect the machine to a network and install software at the same time.
You can connect the machine to a wireless network using [Quick Setup] when the following conditions are
satisfied:
• Your computer is connected to the access point or wireless router that you want to set on the machine.
• The machine is not connected to another wireless network.
Note
• Connecting the machine to a wireless network using [Quick Setup] may be unavailable depending on your environment.
• When connecting to a wireless network with the encryption type set to WEP, you cannot use [Quick Setup]. Configure the
wireless network settings from the operator panel of the machine, and install the software using [Custom Installation].
For details about the wireless network settings, see "Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.28)," and for details
about installing software, see "Installing With [Custom Installation] (P.35)."
Refer
• For details about how to connect the machine to a wireless network and how to install the software using [Quick Setup],
see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)."
Connecting Using Support Tools (Windows®)

You can configure the wireless network settings using the Support Tools in the "Software/Product Manual" disc.
You can connect the machine to a wireless network using Support Tools when the following conditions are
satisfied:
• Your computer is connected to the access point or wireless router that you want to set on the machine.
• The machine is not connected to another wireless network.
1. Insert the "Software/Product Manual" disc into your computer.

2. Click [Support Tools/Manuals].
3. Click [Wi-Fi Settings].
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the settings.
2.2.5 Setting the IP Address

Setting the IP Address
This section describes how to set/change the IP address.
Note
• When you specify an IP address in IPv6 mode, use the Support Tools in the "Software/Product Manual" disc or
CentreWare Internet Services. For details about the Support Tools, see "Setting the IP Address Using [Support Tools]
(Windows®) (P.31)." For details about CentreWare Internet Services, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
 Setting the IP Address From the Operator Panel

30 User Guide
2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings].

4. When the machine is connected to a wired network, tap [Ethernet]. When the machine is connected
to a wireless network, tap [Wi-Fi].
5. Tap [IP Mode].
Tap [Dual Stack], [IPv4], or [IPv6] according to your environment.
Note
• If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select [Dual Stack].
6. Tap [TCP/IP] > [IP Addressing].
7. Set the IP address.
• To set the IP address automatically:
a Tap [DHCP/AutoIP], [BOOTP], [RARP], or [DHCP].
• To set the IP address manually:
a Tap [Manual Input].
b Tap [IP Address].
c Enter the IP address, and then tap [OK].
d Tap [Subnet Mask].
e Enter the subnet mask address, and then tap [OK].
f Tap [Gateway Address].
g Enter the gateway address, and then tap [OK].
8. Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again.
 Setting the IP Address Using [Support Tools] (Windows®)

2. Click [Support Tools/Manuals].

3. Click [IP Address Settings].
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the settings.
Checking the IP Address

You can check the settings by using the operator panel, or by printing the System Settings report.
 Using the Operator Panel

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [About].
4. Check the IP address displayed in [IPv4] or [IPv6].
 Using the System Settings Report
1. Print the System Settings report.
Refer
• For details about how to print the list, see "Printing Information Pages (P.230)."
2. Check the IP address listed under [Network Settings] or [Network (Wireless)] in the list.
32 User Guide
2.2.6 Installing Software for Windows®
Using the "Software/Product Manual" Disc
With the "Software/Product Manual" disc, you can use the following features.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 [Quick Setup]
You can install the basic software you can use with the machine all at once. If you use this machine in a wireless
network, you can connect the machine to the network and install software at the same time.
The following software can be installed:
– PCL Driver
– Scanner Driver
– Print & Scan Hub
Note
• The Scanner Driver can be installed when the machine and the computer are connected via USB.
Refer
• For details about how to install, see "Installing With [Quick Setup] (P.34)."
• For details about Print & Scan Hub, see "Print & Scan Hub (Windows®) (P.274)."
2 [Custom Installation] > [Driver]
You can select and install only the drivers that you need. The following drivers can be installed:
– PCL Driver
– Scanner Driver
Note
• The Scanner Driver can be installed when the machine and the computer are connected via USB.
Refer
• For details about how to install, see "Installing With [Custom Installation] (P.35)."
3 [Custom Installation] > [Software]
You can select and install only the software that you need. The following software can be installed:
– Print & Scan Hub
– Address Book Editor
– ContentsBridge Utility
Refer
• For details about how to install, see "Installing With [Custom Installation] (P.35)."
• For details about the software, see "Using Software Supplied With the Machine (P.274)."

4 [Support Tools] > [Create Driver Setup Disk]
You can create a setup disk for the drivers. Using the setup disk reduces the amount of work required when
installing drivers on multiple computers with the same settings.
Note
• The setup disk cannot be used on a computer that has a different operating system than the computer that the setup
disk was created on. Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.
5 [Support Tools] > [IP Address Settings]
You can configure the IP address settings.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "Setting the IP Address Using [Support Tools] (Windows®) (P.31)."
6 [Support Tools] > [Wi-Fi Settings]
You can configure the wireless LAN settings.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "Connecting Using Support Tools (Windows®) (P.29)."
7 [Media Information]
You can view the contents in the "Software/Product Manual" disc.
8 [Model-specific Manual]
You can display the User Guide (this manual) and the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
Installing With [Quick Setup]

Note
• Perform the following procedure in advance, and then start installing.
- "Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network (P.25)"
- "Connecting to a Computer With USB (P.26)"
- "Preparing to Use a Wireless Network (P.26)"

Note
• If the "Software/Product Manual" disc does not start, perform the following.
1 Click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Accessories] > [Run].
For Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click [Run].
2 Enter "D:\Launcher.exe" ("D" is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click [OK].
2. Click [Quick Setup].
34 User Guide
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup.
Installing With [Custom Installation]

Note
• Perform the following procedure in advance, and then start installing.
- "Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network (P.25)"
- "Connecting to a Computer With USB (P.26)"
- "Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.26)"

Note
• If the "Software/Product Manual" disc does not start, perform the following.
1 Click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Accessories] > [Run].
For Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click [Run].
2 Enter "D:\Launcher.exe" ("D" is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click [OK].
2. Click [Driver] or [Software].
When you select [Software], proceed to step 5.
3. Select [I accept the terms of the license agreement], and then click [Next].
4. Select the connection method you are using, and then click [Next].
2.2.7 Installing Software for Mac

Installing Software
2. Open the following folders in the disc: [Software] > [MacSSW] > [MacOSX] > [Common].

3. Double-click the pkg file in the folder.
Registering the Machine in a Mac

 Adding the Machine Using USB Connection
The following procedure uses macOS 10.12 as an example.
1. Turn on the machine.

2. Connect the USB cable to the machine and your computer.
3. From the [Apple] menu, open [System Preferences], and then click [Printers & Scanners].
4. If the machine is displayed in the [Printers] list, registration is complete.

If the machine is not displayed, add the machine following step 5 and the steps that follow.
5. Click .
36 User Guide
6. From the [Name] list, select the name of your machine with [USB] displayed in the [Kind] column.
7. From the [Use] drop-down list box, select a driver supported for the machine.
8. Click [Add].

9. Specify the optional accessories installed on the machine, and then click [OK].
10. Make sure that the machine is displayed in the [Printers] list.
 Adding a Machine Using LPD Connection


2. Make sure that your computer and the machine are connected.
If you use a wired connection, connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable.
If you use a wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection of your computer and the
machine are established properly.
38 User Guide
4. Click .
5. Click [IP].
6. From the [Protocol] drop-down list box, select [Line Printer Daemon - LPD].

7. Enter the IP address for the machine in the [Address] area.
9. Click [Add].
40 User Guide
 Adding the Machine Using Bonjour


2. Make sure that your computer and the machine are connected.
If you use a wired connection, connect the machine to the network using an Ethernet cable.
If you use a wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection of your computer and the
machine are established properly.

4. Click .
5. From the [Name] list, select the name of your machine with [Bonjour Multifunction] displayed in the
[Kind] column.
42 User Guide
7. Click [Add].
Enabling Optional Accessories

On the driver, specify the optional accessories installed on the machine to enable the associated features.

2. Select the machine in the [Printers] list, and then click [Options & Supplies].
3. Click [Options].
44 User Guide
4. Select the optional accessories installed on the printer, and then click [OK].
2.2.8 Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers

(CUPS)
The latest print drivers for Linux computers can be downloaded from our official web site. The communication
fee shall be borne by users.

3 Using Your Machine
3.1 Using the Operator Panel......................................................................................47

3.2 Power Saver Mode....................................................................................................59
3.3 Checking Jobs ............................................................................................................61
3.4 Print Media Guidelines ...........................................................................................63
3.5 Loading Print Media................................................................................................67
3.6 Loading a Document ..............................................................................................74
46 User Guide
3.1 Using the Operator Panel
The operator panel consists of a touch panel, a <Home> button, a <Power> button, data LED, status
LED, and <NFC>. Use the operator panel to browse the various menus, and enter texts and numbers.
Touch Panel
<Home> button
<NFC> <Power> button
Data LED
Status LED
3.1.1 About the Home Screen

To display the [Home] screen, press the <Home> button. You can customize the [Home] screen to suit your
preference or work style.
Refer
• For details about how to customize your [Home] screen, see "Customizing the Home Screen (P.50)."
Sidebar Button Widget Tiles Sidebar Button Widget Tiles
Widget Tiles
You can use the following tiles on the [Home] screen:
[Copy]
You can make copies, or configure the copy settings.
Refer
• "Making a Copy (P.101)"
3 Using Your Machine 47

[Fax]
You can send and receive faxes, or configure the fax settings.
Refer
• "Sending/Receiving a Fax (P.162)"
[Scan to Email]
You can scan documents and send the scanned data by e-mail, or configure the scan settings.
Refer
• "Sending Scanned Data via E-Mail (Scan to Email) (P.134)"
[ID Card Copy]

You can make ID card copies, or configure the ID card copy settings.
Refer
• "Making ID Card Copies (P.110)"
[Scan to Network]
You can scan documents and send the scanned data to a server, or configure the scan settings.
Refer
• "Storing to a Computer or Server With FTP/SMB (Scan to Network) (P.119)"
[CloudServiceHub]
You can print files stored in a cloud storage service or save scanned data in a cloud storage service. You can also
send scanned data to an e-mail address that you use to login.
Refer
• "Using the Cloud Service Hub (P.179)"
[Address Book]
You can register an address to the address book, or edit/delete the contact information.
Refer
• "Using the Address Book (P.279)"
[Device]
You can configure the basic machine settings.
Refer
• "Changing the Machine Settings (P.214)"
[Jobs]
You can check the job status or cancel active jobs. Also, you can print the print jobs stored in the machine or the
faxes received in the secure receiving mode.
Refer
• "Checking Jobs (P.61)"
• "Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel (P.81)"
• "Secure Print (P.83)"
• "Sample Set (P.84)"
• "Printing Received Faxes (P.170)"
[USB]
You can directly save scanned data to a USB flash drive, and also print documents and photos stored in the USB
flash drive.
Refer
• "Printing a File in a USB Flash Drive (USB Direct Print) (Optional) (P.86)"
• "Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive (Scan to USB Drive) (Optional) (P.144)"
48 User Guide
[Scan to WSD]
You can send scanned data to a computer with Web Services on Devices (WSD).
Refer
• "Storing to a Computer Connected to the Network (Scan to WSD) (P.129)"
Sidebar
When you tap the sidebar button on the upper left corner of the [Home] screen, the side bar screen appears. The
sidebar screen displays the toner status, error messages, network information, and Wi-Fi Direct information.
Note
• The sidebar button may appear with a mark to show the status of the machine. To show the details, tap the sidebar
button.
Shows that there are notifications and the number of the notifications.
Shows that there is an active job.
Shows that there is an error or a job is stopped.
You can open the [Jobs] menu by tapping , or open the [Device] menu by tapping on the top right of
the screen.
3.1.2 Basic Operations on the Touch Panel

Selecting Tiles and Menus on the Screen
Tap the tile or menu.

Scrolling the Screen
Flick or swipe the screen upward or downward.
3.1.3 Customizing the Home Screen

You can customize the [Home] screen to suit your preference or work style.
For example, you can rearrange the tiles so that you can easily access the tiles you often use, or you can delete
the tiles from the [Home] screen that you do not often use.
Also, if you make the tiles with the frequently-used job settings like "taking 15 sets of two-sided color copies,"
you can perform those jobs by simple operations without specifying the settings each time.
Moving Tiles
1. Tap [Home ] > [Customize].
2. Tap and hold the tile that you want to move, and then drag it to the desired place.
50 User Guide
The short orange bar appears in the place the tile is moved to. Confirm the place, and release the tile.
3. Tap [Done].
Adding the Predefined Tiles

You can add the predefined tiles to the [Home] screen.
2. Tap [Add].
3. Tap the tile that you want to add to your [Home] screen.
4. Tap [Done].

Creating New Tiles
You can create the tiles registered with the job settings that you often use, and save it on the [Home] screen.
 Creating a New Tile

The following explanation is an example to create your custom tile for copying.
To create custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing or scanning, follow the same procedures on the job settings
screen of each job.
1. Tap [Copy] on the [Home] screen.
2. Change the copy settings.

Refer
• For details about the copy settings, see "Various Copy Features (P.103)."
3. Tap [Copy ] > [Save as New App].
4. Enter the name of the tile.

Refer
• For details about how to enter characters, see "Entering Characters (P.54)."
5. Tap [Next].
6. Tap the color tile and image icon that you want to set as your custom tile.
52 User Guide
7. Tap [Done].
Note
• When you save the job settings for [Fax] or [Scan to Email] as a custom tile, recipient information is saved together with
the settings. To prevent sending faxes or e-mails to the wrong recipients, make sure that the fax numbers or e-mail
addresses of the recipients displayed on the touch panel are correct.
 Editing Your Custom Tile

You can edit the job settings saved in your custom tile. The following explanation is an example to edit your
custom tile for copying.
To edit your custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing or scanning, follow the same procedures on the job
settings screen of each job.
1. Tap [Copy] on the [Home] screen.

2. Change the job settings as needed.
3. Tap [Copy ] > [Save as New Default].
4. Tap the text box to enter the tile name if you want to rename the tile.
Refer
• For details about how to enter characters, see "Entering Characters (P.54)."
5. Tap [Next].
6. Tap the color tile and image icon that you want to set as your custom tile.
7. Tap [Done].
Deleting Tiles

2. Select the tile that you want to delete, and then tap on the upper left.
3. Tap [Yes] > [Done].
3.1.4 Entering Characters

A keyboard is displayed on the touch panel when input of characters is required, for example when registering a
destination.
You can enter the following characters:
Item Description
Alphabets To enter uppercase letters, tap . To return to the lowercase letters,
tap again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap .
Symbols Tap .
A space Tap .
Deleting characters Tap to delete one character at a time.
Note
• If you want to change the keyboard language, change the display language on the operator panel. For details, see
"[Language] (P.227)."
3.1.5 Restricting the Touch Panel Operation

You can restrict access to the settings with a passcode. This prevents unauthorized users from changing the
settings.
Access restrictions can be applied on the following settings:
• [Address Book]
• [Information Pages]
• [General]
• [Network Settings]
• [App Defaults]
• [Security Settings]
54 User Guide
• [Maintenance]
• [Advanced Settings]
Enabling the Panel Lock

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Security Settings] > [Panel Lock].
4. Tap for [Panel Lock Settings] to display the check mark.

5. Enter a four-digit passcode, and then tap [OK].
6. Re-enter the passcode, and then tap [OK].
Changing the Panel Lock Passcode


2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Security Settings].
4. Enter the current passcode, and then tap [OK].

5. Tap [Panel Lock] > [Change Passcode].
56 User Guide
7. Enter the new passcode, and then tap [OK].
8. Re-enter the new passcode, and then tap [OK].
Disabling the Panel Lock

Note
• You need to disable [Secure Fax Receive], [User Authentication], and [Service Lock] before disabling the Panel Lock. For
details, see "[Secure Fax Receive] (P.257)," "[User Authentication] (P.257)," and "[Service Lock] (P.256)."

2. Tap [Device].

5. Tap [Panel Lock].

6. Tap of [Panel Lock Settings] to hide the check mark.
3.1.6 Restricting Usage of Functions on Each User

When the User Authentication feature is enabled, you can give the registered users permission to use the
features, or limit the features that unregistered users (guest users) can use. Furthermore, you can limit the
features that each registered user can use. To use the machine, registered users need to login to their user
account from the operator panel. If a registered user uses the machine without logging in, the user will be
treated as a guest user.
Refer
• For details, see "Using the User Authentication Feature (P.324)."
58 User Guide
3.2 Power Saver Mode
You can save the power consumption using the power saver mode.
3.2.1 Entering the Power Saver Mode

The machine enters the power saver mode in the following cases:
• When the machine is not used for a certain period of time.
• When the [Sleep Mode] is selected by pressing the <Power> button.
When the machine is in the power saver mode, the <Power> button blinks slowly.
3.2.2 Phases of the Power Saver Mode

The power saver mode has two phases; the low power mode and the sleep mode.
The low power mode is the first phase. When the low power mode continues for the specified time length, the
machine moves to the sleep mode.
3.2.3 Changing the Elapsed Time Before the

Machine Enters the Power Saver Mode
2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [General] > [Power Saver].

4. Tap [Low Power Timer] or [Sleep Timer].
Refer
• For details, see "[Power Saver] (P.237)."
5. Enter the desired value.
6. Tap [OK].

3.2.4 Recovering From the Power Saver Mode
Press the <Power> button to recover from the power saver mode.
60 User Guide
3.3 Checking Jobs
On the [Jobs] screen, you can check the status of the jobs or cancel the pending jobs. You can also print or delete
the jobs stored in the machine.
Note
• You can also check the job status with the report or CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see "[Job History] (P.229)"
or the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
3.3.1 Checking the Job Status

2. Tap [Jobs].
Job status is listed.
Note
• You can list only the fax, print, or scan jobs. Tap the button on the upper right corner, and select the job type from [Job
Filter].
• The jobs completed normally are listed under the jobs in progress.
• Tap a job to display the detailed information on the job.
3.3.2 Canceling the Pending Jobs


2. Tap [Jobs].
3. Select the job you want to cancel.
4. Tap [Delete Job].
5. When the message "Do you want to cancel the job?" is displayed, tap [Yes].
3.3.3 Printing/Deleting Jobs Stored in the Machine

Printing/Deleting Stored Print Jobs
You can print or delete the jobs that are stored for Secure Print and Sample Set.
Refer
• For details, see "Secure Print (P.83)" or "Sample Set (P.84)."
Printing Faxes Received Using the Secure Receiving Mode

On the model with the fax function, enter a four-digit passcode to print the received faxes using the secure
receiving mode.
Refer
• For details, see "Printing Received Faxes (P.170)."
62 User Guide
3.4 Print Media Guidelines
3.4.1 Print Media That We Recommend
WARNING
• Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-coated paper. When paper
jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.
Use the supported print media to print or copy clearly. The standard paper shown in the following table is
recommended.
Paper Type Specified for Paper Paper Name Paper Weight (gsm)
Tray
Plain* P 64
Plain Colotech+ 90
*
Select [Lightweight] for [Plain] from [Adjust Paper Type]. For details, see "[Adjust Paper Type] (P.260)."
For information about other paper and media, contact our Customer Support Center.
Important
• The toner may come off print media if it gets wet by water, rain, or steam. For details, contact our Customer Support
Center.
3.4.2 Usable Paper Weight and Paper Amount on

Each Tray
Paper Tray Supported Paper Weight Paper Capacity*
(gsm)
Tray 1 60 - 90 250 sheets
Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional) 60 - 256 500 sheets
Tray 5 (Bypass) 60 - 216 98 sheets
* When using 80 gsm paper
3.4.3 Usable Print Media on Each Tray

Paper Type
Paper Type Paper Tray 1 Tray 2 (One Tray 5 Automatic
Weight Tray Module) (Bypass) Duplex
(gsm) (Optional)
Plain 60 - 90
Plain Reload 60 - 90 -
Bond 91 - 105 -
Bond Reload 91 - 105 - -

Paper Type Paper Tray 1 Tray 2 (One Tray 5 Automatic
Weight Tray Module) (Bypass) Duplex
(gsm) (Optional)
Recycled 60 - 89
Recycled Reload 60 - 89 -
Prepunched 60 - 89
Letterhead 60 - 89
Covers 106 - 169 -
Covers Reload 106 - 169 - -
Covers Thick 170 - 256 - (170 - 216) -

Covers Thick Reload 170 - 256 - (170 - 216) -
Coated 106 - 169 -
Coated Reload 106 - 169 - -

Coated Thick 170 - 256 - (170 - 216) -
Coated Thick Reload 170 - 256 - (170 - 216) -
Labels 106 - 256 - (106 - 216) -
Preprinted 60 - 89
Colored 60 - 89
Postcard - - - -
Postcard Reload - - - -
Envelope - - - -
: Supported - : Not supported

Note
• Automatic duplex function is available for the paper whose paper weight is 60 to 169 gsm.
Paper Size
 Standard Size
Note
• When you use the standard size that is not displayed in [Paper Size] of each function, register the paper size in [Custom
Paper Size].
Paper Size Orientation Tray 1 Tray 2 (One Tray 5 Automatic

Tray Module) (Bypass) Duplex
(Optional)
A3 (297 x 420 mm) LEF Orientation - - - -
SEF Orientation
B4 (257 x 364 mm) LEF Orientation - - - -
SEF Orientation
A4 (210 x 297 mm) LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
64 User Guide
Paper Size Orientation Tray 1 Tray 2 (One Tray 5 Automatic
Tray Module) (Bypass) Duplex
(Optional)
B5 (182 x 257 mm) LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
A5 (148 x 210 mm) LEF Orientation - - - -
SEF Orientation
8K (270 x 390 mm) LEF Orientation - - - -
SEF Orientation
16K (195 x 270 mm) LEF Orientation

SEF Orientation - -
Tabloid (11 x 17") LEF Orientation - - - -
SEF Orientation
Legal (8.5 x 14") LEF Orientation - - - -
SEF Orientation
8.5 x 13" LEF Orientation - - - -
SEF Orientation
Letter (8.5 x 11") LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
: Supported - : Not supported
 Custom Size
Tray 1 Not available.
Tray 2 (One Tray Module) Width: 140 - 297 mm

(Optional) Length: 182 - 432 mm
Tray 5 (Bypass) Width: 89 - 297 mm

Length: 98 - 432 mm
The automatic duplex function is available when the custom paper is specified with the following paper size and
weight:
Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional)
Width: 140 - 297 mm
Length: 182 - 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 - 169 gsm
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Width: 128 - 297 mm
Length: 140 - 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 - 169 gsm
Unacceptable Print Media

To avoid machine problems, do not use the following print media:
• Creased or wrinkled print media

• Damp or rippled print media
• Curled print media
• Partly used label sheets
• Printouts from other printers or copying machines
• Transparency films
• Backlight films
• Water transfer paper
• Inkjet paper
• Thermal paper, heat transfer paper
• Textile transfer paper
• Paper whose reverse side is printed in solid color
• Pressure sensitive paper
• Soft paper such as the one whose paper fiber orientation is parallel to the short side of the paper
• Embossed paper
• Perforated paper
Some other print media may be unacceptable. For details, contact our Customer Support Center.
3.4.4 Storing and Handling Print Media

Storing Print Media
• Store print media in a cabinet or a place with low humidity. Print media containing moisture may cause
paper jams or print quality problems.
• When the print media package is opened but not used up, store unused print media in the wrapping paper.
• Store print media on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Store print media in places not exposed to direct sunlight.
Handling Print Media

• Straighten the edges of the print media stack before loading.
• Do not load multiple sizes of paper at the same time.
• Flex and fan label sheets before loading, otherwise a paper jam may occur or multiple sheets may be fed
at a time.
66 User Guide
3.5 Loading Print Media
3.5.1 Loading Print Media in Tray 1 and Tray 2
Important
• Do not remove the tray while the machine is copying or printing.
1. Pull out the paper tray until it stops.
Important
• Do not load different sizes or types of paper on top of any remaining paper in a tray. Doing so may cause paper jams or
loading errors.
• Pulling out all the trays at once may cause the machine to tilt or fall, causing injury.
If any paper is loaded, remove it.

When loading in Tray 1, push down the metal plate.

2. Move the paper guides to the position to fit the paper size.
3. Before loading print media, flex and fan the sheets. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level
surface.
4. Load print media with the side to copy or print on facing up, aligning the leading edge with the left
side of the tray.
Important
• Do not load print media above the fill line shown as "MAX." Doing so may cause a jam or a malfunction.
Note
• If the paper guides are not aligned with the paper, it may cause a paper jam. When the paper guides are not aligned
with the paper, adjust the position of the paper guides.
• When you load custom size paper in Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (optional), adjust the paper guides according to the
paper size.
5. Gently push the tray until it stops.
Important
• When pushing the tray, do it slowly. If the paper tray is pushed with too much force, it may cause a malfunction.
68 User Guide
6. When the screen appears to specify the paper, make sure that the paper size loaded in the tray is
displayed on the bottom left of the screen.
Note
• The machine is set at the factory to display the screen to specify the paper. If the screen does not appear, tap [Device] >
[Trays], and select the [Display Tray Prompt] check box for each tray.
7. Tap the paper type on the bottom right of the screen, and select the paper type.
8. Tap [OK].
3.5.2 Loading Print Media in Tray 5 (Bypass)

Important
• Do not add print media to or remove it from Tray 5 (bypass) when a print job is in progress. This may result in a paper
jam.
1. Open Tray 5 (bypass).

Note
• Extend the extension tray as needed. The extension tray should be extended slowly.
2. Adjust the paper guides according to the paper size that you want to load.

3. Load print media stack neatly aligned, pushing the stack lightly until it stops with the side to be
copied or printed facing down.
Important
• Do not load multiple types of paper at the same time.
• Do not load print media above the fill line. Doing so may cause a jam or a malfunction.
Note
• If the paper guides are not aligned with the paper, it may cause a paper jam. When the paper guides are not aligned
with the paper, adjust the position of the paper guides.
• When you load custom size paper, adjust the paper guides according to the paper size.
4. When the screen appears to specify the paper, hide the check mark for [Use Driver Setting].
Note
• The machine is set at the factory to display the screen to specify the paper. If the screen does not appear, tap [Device] >
[Trays], and select the [Display Tray Prompt] check box for Tray 5 (bypass).
5. Tap the paper size on the bottom left of the screen, and select the paper size.
6. Tap the paper type on the bottom right of the screen, and select the paper type.
7. Tap [OK].
Printing on Print Media Loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass)

1. Load paper in Tray 5 (bypass).
2. Select the [Use Driver Setting] checkbox on the [Tray 5 (Bypass) Settings] screen displayed on the
operator panel.
3. Select [Tray 5 (Bypass)] from [Select By Tray] on the print driver.
4. Specify the size and type of paper loaded in Tray 5 (bypass) on the print driver.
70 User Guide
5. Start printing.
Note
• You can select [Automatically Select] from [Select By Tray] on the print driver. In this case, clear the check mark for [Use
Driver Setting] on the [Tray 5 (Bypass) Settings] screen, and specify the size and type of paper loaded in Tray 5 (bypass)
correctly.
Refer
• For details about a print driver feature, see the print driver help.
Copying on Print Media Loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass)

1. Load paper in Tray 5 (bypass).
2. Clear the check mark for [Use Driver Setting] on the [Tray 5 (Bypass) Settings] screen displayed on the
operator panel.
3. Specify the size and type of paper loaded in Tray 5 (bypass).
4. Start copying.
Refer
• For details about a copy feature, see "Copying (P.100)."

3.5.3 Loading Envelopes
Important
• You can load envelopes only in Tray 5 (bypass).
Note
• Use only freshly unpacked new envelopes.
If the envelopes are not loaded right after they are unpacked, they may curl. To avoid jams, press the envelopes firmly
to flatten them as shown in the illustration before loading the envelopes.
Feed direction
• Do not load different sized envelopes at the same time.

• The maximum height of envelopes that can be loaded in Tray 5 (bypass) is about 10 mm (0.39").
• If envelopes are not fed correctly, curl the edge of the envelopes as shown in the following illustration. It is
recommended that the amount of the curl should be 2 or 3 mm (0.08 or 0.12"). The area of the curl should be 8 to 10
mm (0.32 to 0.39") from the top edge of the envelopes. Do not curl the envelopes too much or make a crease.
Feed direction
2 - 3 mm
(0.08 - 0.12")
8 - 10 mm (0.32 - 0.39")
72 User Guide
Envelopes With a Flap on the Long Edge (Side-Opening Envelopes)
Load envelopes with the flaps closed and with the side to be copied or printed facing down so that the top edge
(side with a flap) is pulled in first to the machine.
Envelopes With a Flap on the Short Edge (Top-Opening Envelopes)

Load envelops with the side to be copied or printed facing down so that the bottom edge (side without a flap) is
pulled in first to the machine.

3.6 Loading a Document
You can use the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) or the document glass to load a document.
Documents that can be loaded on the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF):
• One-sheet document
• Multiple-sheet document
Documents that can be loaded on the Document glass:
• One-sheet document
• Booklet
There are two methods to load a document as shown below.
3.6.1 Loading a Document on the Duplex

Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
You can load only standard size documents in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
When document is loaded in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF), the machine detects the
document size automatically. The following standard size documents are detected automatically: A3, B4, A4 ,
A4, B5 , B5*, A5, 11 x 17", 8.5 x 14"*, 8.5 x 13"*, 8.5 x 11" , 8.5 x 11", 8K, 16K , 16K*.
*
You can specify the document sizes to be automatically detected on [Device] > [General] > [Original Size
Detected]. For details, see "[Original Size Detected] (P.237)."
Important
• Load the document with wrinkles, creases or curls, the document you have cut or trimmed, or the document of
carbon-backed paper on the document glass to avoid paper jams.
1. Before loading a document, remove the paper clips or staples.
74 User Guide
2. Load a document facing up (front side facing up for a two-sided document) into the Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
Important
• Remove sticky notes, paper clips, adhesive tapes or staples before loading documents. Otherwise they may cause a jam
or a malfunction on the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
Important
• Do not load a document above the fill line shown as "MAX." Doing so may cause a jam or a malfunction.
3. Adjust the document guides according to the document size that you want to load.
Note
• Extend the document stopper to prevent documents from falling off.

3.6.2 Loading a Document on the Document Glass
Automatically Detected Document Sizes
The document size is detected automatically when [Original Size] is set to [Auto].
The following document sizes can be detected automatically: A3, B4, A4 , A4, B5 , B5, A5, 11 x 17", 8.5 x
11" , 8K, 16K , and 16K.
You can specify the document sizes to be automatically detected on [Device] > [General] > [Original Size
Detected]. For details, see "[Original Size Detected] (P.237)."
Supported Document Sizes

You can select one of the following document sizes except [Auto] from [Original Size]: A3, B4, A4 , A4, B5 ,
B5, A5, 11 x 17", 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11" , 8.5 x 11", 8K, 16K , and 16K.
CAUTION
• Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may break the glass and cause
injuries.
Note
• When [Original Size] is set to [Auto], an error screen appears when you place a non-standard size document on the
document glass. In this case, select a document size manually instead of selecting [Auto]. Depending on the selected
document size, the printout may be too large for the paper or may have shadows at the edges.
• Make sure that a document is not loaded in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). The document loaded in
the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is given priority over the document on the document glass.
1. Open the document glass cover.
2. Place a document facing down on the document glass and align it to the top left corner of the
document glass.
3. Close the document glass cover.
76 User Guide
4 Printing
4.1 Printing From a Computer.....................................................................................78

4.2 Canceling a Print Job ..............................................................................................81
4.3 Printing Color Jobs in Black and White ............................................................82
4.4 Using Stored Print (Windows®) ..........................................................................83
4.5 Printing a File in a USB Flash Drive (USB Direct Print) (Optional) ........86
4.6 Printing on Envelopes .............................................................................................97
4 Printing 77
4.1 Printing From a Computer
Note
• Print settings made from a print driver have precedence over the menu settings made from the operator panel. For
details about a print driver feature, see the print driver help.
The following describes a typical printing procedure.
4.1.1 For Windows®

1. Open the file that you want to print.
2. From the [File] menu, select [Print].
Note
• Menu names may differ depending on the application.
3. Select the machine from [Select Printer], and then click [Preferences].
78 User Guide
4. Configure the settings on [Preferences] as needed, and then click [OK].
5. Click [Print].
4.1.2 For Mac

Note
• When you use the AirPrint feature with a USB connection, click [Connectivity] on the left pane in CentreWare Internet
Services, select [AirPrintTM] in [Mobile Printing], and select the [USB Connection] check box. For details, see the
CentreWare Internet Services Help.

Note
• Menu names may differ depending on the application.
4 Printing 79
3. Select the machine from [Printer], and then configure the print settings as needed.
4. Click [Print].
80 User Guide
4.2 Canceling a Print Job
4.2.1 Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
2. Tap [Jobs].
3. Tap [All Jobs] > [Print Jobs], and then select the print job that you want to cancel.
4. Tap [Delete Job].
4.2.2 Canceling a Job From a Computer

Cancel a print job from the operating system or application you are using.
Refer
• For details, see the help of the operating system or application you are using.
4 Printing 81
4.3 Printing Color Jobs in Black and
White
Forcibly prints color jobs in black and white for all users.
Note
• With Print Accounting, you can set the restrictions for color printing on each user. For details, see "Using Print Accounting
(P.290)."
• You cannot print color jobs in black and white from Mac.

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Security Settings] > [Print Accounting].

4. Tap [Print Accounting] > [Off].
5. Tap [Auto Color To Mono Print] > [On].
7. Perform printing.
Refer
• For details about how to print, see "Printing From a Computer (P.78)."
82 User Guide
4.4 Using Stored Print (Windows®)
The print documents can be stored temporarily in the machine, and can be printed from the operator panel. This
feature includes two types of jobs. One is Secure Print which can manage confidential documents by assigning
passcode, and the other is Sample Set which is convenient when printing a large number of copies.
Note
• The data in the memory is cleared when the machine is turned off.
• The stored print feature is available when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
- When [RAM Disk] is set to [Enable] on [Device]
- When [RAM Disk] is set to [Installed] on the print driver
- When the memory of the machine has enough free space to store data
- The stored print feature is available when you print a document from Windows®.
Secure Print
You can store print jobs secured with a passcode in the machine. This feature is useful to print confidential
documents, since the job can be printed only when the passcode is entered on the operator panel.
Sending print job Entering passcode from the operator panel Printing document
Confidential
Sample Set
You can print a single copy as a sample before printing a large number of copies.
Sending print job Printing one set to check Printing the rest of the set
x4
4.4.1 Secure Print

Specifying With the Print Driver
On the [Paper/Output] tab of the print driver, select [Secure Print] from [Job Type], and then send the print job.
Refer
Note
• You must specify a passcode for the Secure Print job.
Printing Secure Print Jobs

4 Printing 83
2. Tap [Jobs].
3. Tap [Stored Print Jobs] to select the desired folder.

4. Enter the specified passcode.
5. Select the document you want to print, and then specify the number of printouts.
Note
• To delete the document after printing, tap [Delete after Printing] to display the check mark.
6. Tap [Print].
Deleting Secure Print Jobs

2. Tap [Jobs].

4. Enter the specified passcode.
5. Tap of the document to be deleted.
6. Tap [Yes].
4.4.2 Sample Set

Specifying With the Print Driver
On the [Paper/Output] tab of the print driver, select [Sample Set] from [Job Type], and then send the print job.
Refer
Note
84 User Guide
Printing Sample Set Jobs
2. Tap [Jobs].

4. Select the document you want to print, and then specify the number of printouts.
5. Tap [Print].
Deleting Sample Set Jobs

2. Tap [Jobs].

4. Tap of the document to be deleted.
5. Tap [Yes].
4 Printing 85
4.5 Printing a File in a USB Flash Drive
(USB Direct Print) (Optional)
You can print files stored in a USB flash drive without using a computer.
Important
• Do not remove the USB flash drive from the machine while printing is in progress.
Note
• When [Print Accounting] is enabled, you need to enable [Unauthenticated User Print] to use this feature. For details, see
"[Unauthenticated User Print] (P.258)."
4.5.1 Supported USB Flash Drive and File Formats

Supported USB Flash Drive
You can use a USB flash drive with the following specification:
• USB 2.0/USB 1.1
• Type-A connector
• FAT16/FAT32
Note
• This feature cannot be used on USB flash drives encrypted by a software.
Supported File Formats

Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB flash drive:
• PDF
• TIFF
• JPEG
Note
• This machine may not print the files if the files are not created by the Scan to USB Drive function on this machine.
4.5.2 Printing a File in a USB Flash Drive

2. Insert a USB flash drive into the front USB port of the machine.
86 User Guide
3. Tap [PDF/TIFF Print] or [Photo Print (JPEG)].
4. Select the file that you want to print, and then tap [OK].
Note
• Up to 10 PDF or TIFF files can be selected, and up to 100 JPEG files can be selected. The files are printed in display order.
• For PDF/TIFF Print, tap to display the preview image of the selected file. For Photo Print (JPEG), the preview image
is displayed on the screen for file selection, depending on the type of the JPEG file.
5. Tap , and then configure the print settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about PDF/TIFF Print, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.89)," and for details about Photo Print (JPEG),
see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.93)."
6. Tap [Print].
Important
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the machine is accessing the drive. The data in the drive may be destroyed, or
the drive itself may be damaged and become unusable.
7. Make sure that the machine is not accessing the USB flash drive, and then remove the drive from the
machine.
Configuring the Settings for PDF/TIFF Print Feature

The setting items available on PDF/TIFF Print feature are as follows.
*
are the factory default values.
[Black & White], [Color]*
[Quantity] [1]*- [99]
4 Printing 87
[Paper Trays] [Bypass] [Paper Size] [A3 (297 x 420 mm) ], [B4 (257 x 364
mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4
(210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182
mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5
(148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x
14") ], [8.5 x 13" ], [Letter (8.5 x
11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
[Paper Type] [Plain (60 - 90 gsm)], [Plain Reload], [Bond

(91 - 105 gsm)], [Bond Reload], [Recycled
(60 - 89 gsm)], [Recycled Reload],
[Prepunched (60 - 89 gsm)], [Letterhead (60
- 89 gsm)], [Covers (106 - 169 gsm)],
[Covers Reload], [Covers Thick (170 - 256
gsm)], [Covers Thick Reload], [Coated (106 -
169 gsm)], [Coated Reload], [Coated Thick
(170 - 256 gsm)], [Coated Thick Reload],
[Labels (106 - 256 gsm)], [Preprinted (60 -
89 gsm)], [Colored (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Postcard], [Postcard Reload], [Envelope]
[Tray 1]*
[Tray 2]
[2-Sided Printing] [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided, Long Edge Bind], [2-Sided, Short Edge Bind]
[Layout] [1-Up]*, [2-Up], [4-Up], [Off (No Scaling)]
[PDF Password]
[Image Type] [Auto]*, [Photos (Standard Quality)], [Photos (High Quality)], [Text]
[Collation] [Collated]*, [Uncollated]
You can configure the settings as follows.

88 User Guide
3. Tap [PDF/TIFF Print].
Note
• Tap to display the preview image of the selected file.
5. Select the desired setting item.
Select the file that you want to print.
[Color] [Black]
Specify whether to print in color or black and white.
Configuring the Detailed Settings

1. Tap .
4 Printing 89
[Quantity]
Tap + (plus) or - (minus), or tap the numeric keys to specify the number of printouts.
[Paper Trays]
Select a paper feed tray.
[Bypass] [Paper Size] Select the paper size.

[Paper Type] Select the paper type.
[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]*
*
Available only when Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional) is installed.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For two-sided printing, specify whether the printouts
are bound at the long edge or short edge.
[Layout]
Specify the number of pages to be imposed on one side of print media.
90 User Guide
[PDF Password]
Enter the password to open the secured PDF.
[Image Type]
Select the print image quality.
[Auto] Prints PDF/TIFF files in the [Text] mode.

[Photos (Standard Quality)] Prints the photographic images in standard quality.
[Photos (High Quality)] Prints the photographic images in high quality.
[Text] Prints the text document in standard quality.
[Collation]
Specify whether to print out the file page by page or set by set, when printing multiple sets of copies of the
multiple page file.
[Collated] Prints out the file set by set.

[Uncollated] Prints out the file page by page.
Resetting or Saving the Settings

Perform the following procedure to reset or save the configured settings.
1. Tap [PDF/TIFF Print ].
4 Printing 91
[Reset]
Resets the [PDF/TIFF Print] settings of the machine.
[Save as New Default]

Saves as new default settings. Change the name for the tile as necessary, and then select the color and icon.
Configuring the Settings for Photo Print (JPEG) Feature

The setting items available on Photo Print (JPEG) feature are as follows.
*
[Black & White], [Color]*
[Quantity] [1]* - [99]
mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4
(210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182
mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5
(148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x
14") ], [8.5 x 13" ], [Letter (8.5 x
11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
- 89 gsm)], [Covers (106 - 169 gsm)],
89 gsm)], [Colored (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Tray 1]*
[Tray 2]
92 User Guide

3. Tap [Photo Print (JPEG)].
Note
• To select all the photos in a folder, tap . To deselect all the files in a folder, tap .
[Color] [Black]
Returns to the screen listing the files.

1. Tap .
4 Printing 93
[Quantity]
[Layout]
[Paper Trays]
Select a paper feed tray.

[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]*
* Available only when Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional) is installed.
94 User Guide
[2-Sided Printing]
[Collation]
multiple page file.

[Image Type]
[Auto] Prints JPEG files in the [Photos (Standard Quality)] mode.


4 Printing 95
1. Tap [Photo Print ].
[Reset]
Resets the [Photo Print (JPEG)] settings of the machine.

96 User Guide
4.6 Printing on Envelopes
This section describes how to print using the PCL driver on envelopes loaded in Tray 5 (bypass).
1. Load envelopes in Tray 5 (bypass).

Important
• You can load envelopes only in Tray 5 (bypass).
Note
• Use only freshly unpacked new envelopes.
If the envelopes are not loaded right after they are unpacked, they may curl. To avoid jams, press the envelopes firmly
to flatten them as shown in the illustration before loading the envelopes.
Feed direction
• Do not load different sized envelopes at the same time.

• The maximum height of envelopes that can be loaded in Tray 5 (bypass) is about 10 mm (0.39").
• If envelopes are not fed correctly, curl the edge of the envelopes as shown in the following illustration. It is
recommended that the amount of the curl should be 2 or 3 mm (0.08 or 0.12"). The area of the curl should be 8 to 10
mm (0.32 to 0.39") from the top edge of the envelopes. Do not curl the envelopes too much or make a crease.
Feed direction
2 - 3 mm
(0.08 - 0.12")
8 - 10 mm (0.32 - 0.39")
4 Printing 97
• When loading envelopes with a flap on the long edge (side-opening envelopes):
Load envelopes with the flaps closed and with the side to be printed facing down so that the top edge
(side with a flap) is pulled into the machine first.
• When loading envelopes with a flap on the short edge (top-opening envelopes):
Load envelops with the side to be printed facing down so that the bottom edge (side without a flap) is
pulled into the machine first.

4. Select the machine from [Select Printer], and then click [Preferences].
5. Click [Paper/Output].
98 User Guide
6. Click the icon on the left side of [Paper].
Note
• In the [Advanced Paper Selection] dialog box, you can configure the relevant settings all at once.
7. From the [Original Document Size] drop-down list box, select the document size.
8. From the [Scale Options] drop-down list box, select [Automatically Scale].
9. From the [Output Paper Size] drop-down list box, select the envelope size.
10. From the [Bypass Paper Type] drop-down list box, select [Envelope].
11. Click [OK].
12. Configure the other print settings as needed.
13. Click [OK].
14. Click [Print] to start printing.
4 Printing 99
5 Copying
5.1 Making a Copy........................................................................................................ 101

5.2 Making ID Card Copies ....................................................................................... 110
100 User Guide

5.1 Making a Copy
5.1.1 Basic Copying
Using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
1. Load a document.
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading a Document on the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
(P.74)."
3. Tap [Copy].
4. Tap , and then configure the copy settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the copy settings, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.104)."
5. Tap .
6. Tap the button under [Output Color], and then select the color mode.
7. Tap the number on the numeric keys to specify the number of copies.
5 Copying 101
8. Tap [Start].
Note
• While scanning a document, tapping [Delete Job] will cancel the copy job.
Making Copies From the Document Glass

CAUTION
• Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may break the glass and cause
injuries.
Note
• Remove any documents from the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) before copying from the document glass.
1. Place a document.
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading a Document on the Document Glass (P.76)."
3. Tap [Copy].
Refer
• For details about the copy settings, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.104)."
5. Tap .
6. Tap the button under [Output Color], and then select the color mode.
102 User Guide

7. Tap the number on the numeric keys to specify the number of copies.
8. Tap [Start].
Note
• While scanning a document, tapping [Delete Job] will cancel the copy job.
5.1.2 Various Copy Features

The machine enables you to configure the settings for various copy features as needed. You can configure the
following setting items:
*
[Quantity] [1]*- [999]

[Output Color] [Auto Detect], [Color], [Black & White]*
[Lighten/Darken] [Lighten +3], [Lighten +2], [Lighten +1], [Normal]*, [Darken +1], [Darken +2], [Darken +3]
[Reduce/Enlarge] [Auto %]*, [100%], [50% (A3→A5)], [70% (A3→A4, B4→B5)], [81% (B4→A4, B5→A5)], [86%
(A3→B4, A4→B5)], [115% (B4→A3, B5→A4)], [122% (A4→B4, A5→B5)], [141% (A4→A3,
B5→B4)], [200% (A5→A3)]
Note
• Zoom ratio can be set manually between 25 and 400%.
[Paper Trays] [Auto]*
[Bypass] [Paper Size] [A3 (297 x 420 mm) ], [B4 (257 x 364
mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4
(210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182
mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5
(148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [16K (270 x 195 mm) ],
[16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x
17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x
13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter
(8.5 x 11") ], [Custom Paper Size]

- 89 gsm)], [Covers (106 - 169 gsm)],
89 gsm)], [Colored (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]
[2-Sided] [1→1 Sided]*, [1→2 Sided], [2→1 Sided], [2→2 Sided]
[2-Up] [Off]*, [Auto]
[Sharpness] [Higher], [Normal]*, [Lower]
5 Copying 103
[Original Size] [Auto]*, [A3 (297 x 420 mm) ], [B4 (257 x 364 mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4
(210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210
mm) ], [8K (270 x 390 mm) ], [16K (270 x 195 mm) ], [16K (195 x 270 mm) ],
[11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x 13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter (8.5 x
11") ]
[Original Type] [Text & Photo]*, [Text], [Photo]
[Collation] [Auto]*, [Collated], [Uncollated]
[Saturation] [Vivid], [Normal]*, [Pastel]
[Background On*, Off

Suppression]
[Edge Erase] [Top & Bottom] [2]*
[Left & Right] [2]*

[Middle] [0]*

2. Tap [Copy].
3. Tap the desired setting item.
[Quantity]
Tap the numeric keys to specify the number of copies.
[Output Color]
Specify whether to copy in color or black and white.
When [Auto Detect] is selected, the machine detects color documents and black and white documents to
automatically determine whether to copy the document in color or black and white.

1. Tap .
104 User Guide

[Lighten/Darken]
Specify the density to make the copy darker or lighter.
[Reduce/Enlarge]
Specify the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce the copied image.

When [Auto %] is selected, the optimal zoom ratio is automatically specified according to the document size
and the paper size.
See the following table for specific zoom ratios from the standard size document to the standard size paper
when enlarging or reducing the copied image.
Copy A5 B5 A4 B4 A3
Document
A5 100% 122% 141% 172% 200%
B5 81% 100% 115% 141% 163%

A4 70% 86% 100% 122% 141%
B4 57% 70% 81% 100% 115%
A3 50% 61% 70% 86% 100%
5 Copying 105
[Paper Trays]
Select the paper tray.
[Auto] The paper tray with the optimal size of paper loaded is
automatically selected according to the document size and the
zoom ratio.
[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]*
[2-Sided]
Specify whether to copy on both sides of a sheet of paper.
[1→1 Sided] Copies one-sided documents into one-sided printouts.

[1→2 Sided] Copies one-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Specify whether the
copies are bound at the long edge or the short edge.
[2→1 Sided] Copies two-sided documents into one-sided printouts. Specify whether the
document is bound at the long edge or the short edge.
[2→2 Sided] Copies two-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Specify whether the
copies are bound at the long edge or the short edge.
[2-Up]
Specify whether to copy two pages of a document to fit onto one side of a sheet of paper.
106 User Guide

[Off]
[Auto] Copies two pages of a document onto one side of a sheet of paper. The zoom
ratio is specified automatically.
[Sharpness]
Specify the sharpness level to make the image sharper or softer.
[Original Size]
Select the document size to be copied.

Note
• When [Auto] is selected, the machine detects and specifies the document size automatically.
[Original Type]
Select the document type. You can make a copy with image quality that is optimal for the document type.
[Collation]
Specify whether to print out the copies page by page or set by set, when making multiple sets of copies of the
multiple page document.
5 Copying 107
[Auto] The printouts of the copies are collated when the document is set to the
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
[Collated] Prints out the copies set by set.
[Uncollated] Prints out the copies page by page.
[Saturation]
Specify the vividness of color.
[Background Suppression]
Tap to display the check mark to suppress the background density of the document to enhance the copied
image.
[Edge Erase]
Specify whether to remove the shadows on the top and bottom, the left and right, or the middle when copying a
thick document or a booklet.

1. Tap [Copy ].
108 User Guide

[Reset]
Resets the [Copy] settings of the machine.

[Save as New App]

Copies the existing settings, and saves as a new tile. Change the name for the tile, and then select the color and
icon.
Refer
• For details about how to create a new tile, see "Creating New Tiles (P.52)."
5 Copying 109
5.2 Making ID Card Copies
5.2.1 Basic ID Card Copy
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size. You can also copy
up to two ID cards at the same time.
· When copying only one ID card

Copy output
LEF orientation paper
ID card orientation
ID card
Front Back
Front Back
SEF orientation paper
· When copying two ID cards at the same time

ID card orientation Copy output
LEF orientation paper
ID cards Front Back
First ID card
Front Back
SEF orientation paper

Second ID card Front Back
Front Back

2. Tap [ID Card Copy].
110 User Guide

Note
• To specify the number of copies, tap + (plus) or - (minus) beside [Quantity]. Or tap [Quantity] and enter using the
numeric keys.
• To specify the number of ID cards to be copied, tap [Number Of Cards].
Refer
• For details about the copy settings, see "Various ID Card Copy Features (P.112)."
4. Tap .
5 Copying 111
6. Place the ID card with the side to be copied face down, at least 5 mm away from the upper and left
edges of the document glass.
Note
• If the ID card is placed too close to the upper and left edges of the document glass, the edges of the ID card may not be
copied properly.
• Place the ID card in the same orientation as the image displayed on the operator panel.
7. Close the document glass cover.
8. Tap [Start].
After the front of the ID card is scanned, a message is displayed on the operator panel prompting you to
turn over the card.
To copy the back of the ID card, follow the on-screen instructions on the operator panel.
5.2.2 Various ID Card Copy Features

The machine enables you to configure the settings for various ID card copy features as needed. You can
configure the following setting items:
*
[Quantity] [1]* - [999]
[Output Color] [Auto Detect], [Color], [Black & White]*
112 User Guide

mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4
(210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182
mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5
(148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [16K (270 x 195 mm) ],
[16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x
17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x
13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter
(8.5 x 11") ], [Custom Paper Size]

- 89 gsm)], [Covers (106 - 169 gsm)],
89 gsm)], [Colored (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Tray 1]*
[Tray 2]
[Number Of Cards] [1 Card]*, [2 Cards]

Suppression]

2. Tap [ID Card Copy].
5 Copying 113
3. Tap .
[Quantity]
Tap + (plus) or - (minus), or tap the numeric keys to specify the number of copies.
[Output Color]
Specify whether to copy in color or black and white.

When [Auto Detect] is selected, the machine detects color documents and black and white documents to
automatically determine whether to copy the document in color or black and white.
114 User Guide

[Lighten/Darken]
Specify the density to make the copy darker or lighter.
[Paper Trays]

[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]*
*
Available only when Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional) is installed.
[Number Of Cards]
Select the number of cards to be copied at the same time.
[Sharpness]
5 Copying 115
Tap to display the check mark to suppress the background density of the document to enhance the copied
image.
[Saturation]
Specify the vividness of color.

1. Tap [ID Card Copy ].
[Reset]
Resets the [ID Card Copy] settings of the machine.

[Save as New App]

icon.
Refer
116 User Guide

6 Scanning
6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 118

6.2 Scanning Using the Operator Panel of the Machine .............................. 119
6.3 Scanning From a Computer............................................................................... 152
6 Scanning 117
6.1 Overview
The machine provides several ways to scan your document. There are two scanning types. One is operated from
the machine when scanning, and the other from a computer or a mobile device.
The following illustration shows the overview for each scanning type.
Operate From the Machine

Computer/Mobile Device
"Storing to a Computer Connected to the Network (Scan to WSD) (P.129)"
Operate From a Computer/Mobile Device

Scan "Scanning From a Computer (P.152)"
"Printing and Scanning From Smartphones or Tablets (P.200)"
FTP Server/
Shared Folder
"Storing to a Computer or Server With FTP/SMB (Scan to Network) (P.119)"
E-mail
"Sending Scanned Data via E-Mail (Scan to Email) (P.134)"
USB Flash
Drive
"Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive (Scan to USB Drive) (Optional) (P.144)"
Note
• Using the Cloud Service Hub, you can also store the scanned data to a cloud storage service or send the scanned data by
e-mail. For details, see "Using the Cloud Service Hub (P.179)."
118 User Guide

6.2 Scanning Using the Operator Panel
of the Machine
6.2.1 Storing Scanned Data to a Computer
Storing to a Computer or Server With FTP/SMB (Scan to Network)
The Scan to Network feature allows you to store scanned data to a FTP server or to a shared folder on a
computer. You can also check the scanned data before storing.
To store scanned data, it is necessary to register a server or shared folder address in the address book
beforehand. Install the Address Book Editor on your computer as the addresses of the servers or shared folders
are registered using the Address Book Editor.
Note
• Install the Address Book Editor by [Custom Installation] using the "Software/Product Manual" disc. For details about how
to install, see "Installing With [Custom Installation] (P.35)."
Computer
FTP Server
Scan
Using FTP
Using SMB
Computer
 Storing to an FTP Server

The work flow from preparing to saving is as follows.
Registering the FTP Server Address in the Address Book
Register the FTP server address using the Address Book Editor. For details, see the Address Book Editor help.
Note
• Use the US-ASCII characters for FTP server address and the folder path.
Storing Scanned Data to an FTP server.
1. Load a document.
Refer
• For details about loading a document, see "Loading a Document (P.74)."
6 Scanning 119
3. Tap [Scan to Network].
4. Tap the desired destination.

5. Tap the button under [File Format], and then select the file format of the scanned data to be saved.
6. Tap , and then configure the scan settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.125)."
7. Tap [Start].
Note
• If the message about the next document is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to finish scanning.
 Storing to a Shared Folder Using SMB

The work flow from preparing to saving is as follows.
Setting Up a User Account.
To store scanned data to a Server Message Block (SMB) shared folder, it is necessary to create a shared folder on
a computer. To create a shared folder, a user account with a valid password is required.
Refer
• For details about a user account and password, see the help of your computer.
Creating a Shared Folder.
Create a shared folder to store the scanned data from the machine.
For Windows®:
The following procedure uses Windows® 7 and Windows® 10 as examples.
Note
• You can also use the Address Book Editor to create a shared folder. For details, see the Address Book Editor help.
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.

2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
120 User Guide

3. Click the [Sharing] tab > [Advanced Sharing].
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.

5. Enter the shared name in [Share name].
Note
• The shared name is required in the next setting procedure.
6. Click [Permissions].
7. Click [Add].
8. Select the user login name by performing either of the following:
• Click [Advanced], and then search the user login name.
• Enter the user login name in [Enter the object names to select], and then click [Check Names].
9. Click [OK].
6 Scanning 121
10. Click the selected user login name, and then select the [Allow] check box for [Full Control].
11. Click [OK].

When you are finished creating a shared folder, register destinations to the address book using the Address
Book Editor. For details, see the Address Book Editor help.
For Mac:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.

2. Open the [System Preferences] window, and then click [Sharing].
3. Select the [File Sharing] check box.
4. Click [+] under [Shared Folders].
5. Select the folder you created on step 1, and then click [Add].
6. Click [Options].
7. Select the [Share files and folders using SMB] and account name check boxes.
8. Click [Done].
When you are finished creating a shared folder, register destinations to the address book using the Address
Book Editor. For details, see the Address Book Editor help.
Storing Scanned Data
1. Load a document.
Refer
122 User Guide

Refer
7. Tap [Start].
Note
 Checking the Scanned Data

You can check the scanned data before storing. On the detailed setting screen, display the check mark for
[Preview], and then tap [Preview] on the upper right corner. When a document is scanned, the Preview screen for
the document is displayed.
Refer
• For details about the [Preview] setting, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.125)."
Preview Screen
You can perform the following operations.

[Scan Another Page]
Displayed when the document is placed on the document glass. Tap to scan the next document.
Switches the page to be displayed.
Opens the Preview details screen.
Rotates all the pages by 90 degrees clockwise each time you tap it. Pages are also rotated on the output data.
Note
• is not displayed depending on the file format.
Closes the preview screen.

[Start]
Stores scanned data to a computer or a server.
6 Scanning 123
Preview Details Screen
Switches the page to be displayed. You can also switch the page by flicking or swiping the screen to the right or
left.
Enlarges/reduces the preview.
Rotates the displayed page by 90 degrees clockwise each time you tap it. Pages are also rotated on the output
data.
Note
Closes the Preview details screen.
 Configuring the Settings for the Scan to Network Feature

The setting items available on Scan to Network feature are as follows.
*
[File Format] [PDF]*, [Multi Page TIFF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XDW(DocuWorks)]
[Preview] On, Off*
[Output Color] [Color]*, [Black & White], [Grayscale]
[Resolution] [200 dpi]*, [300 dpi], [400 dpi], [600 dpi]
[2-Sided Scanning] [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided, Long Edge Bind], [2-Sided, Short Edge Bind]
[Contrast] [Higher], [Normal]*, [Lower]
[Background Suppression] On*, Off
[Original Size] [Auto]*, [A3 (297 x 420 mm) ], [B4 (257 x 364 mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210
mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390 mm) ], [16K (270 x 195
mm) ], [16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5
x 13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
[Add Folder] On*, Off
124 User Guide

[File Name] [Auto]*, [Add Prefix], [Add Suffix]
[Left & Right] [2]*
[Middle] [0]*

Select an FTP or SMB server address from the address book.
Displays the information of the registered network address.

[File Format]
Select the file format of the scanned data to be saved.
 Configuring the Detailed Settings

1. Tap .
6 Scanning 125
[Preview]
Tap to display the check mark to display the preview of the scanned data before storing.
[Output Color]
Select the color mode when scanning a document.

When [Black & White] is selected, documents are output as black and white images. When [Grayscale] is
selected, documents are output as grayscale images.
[Resolution]
Select the scan resolution rate when scanning a document.

Note
• When [Output Color] is set to [Color], [600 dpi] cannot be selected.
[2-Sided Scanning]
Specify whether to scan both sides of documents. For two-sided documents, specify whether the document is
bound at the long edge or the short edge.
126 User Guide

[Lighten/Darken]
Specify the density to make the scanned data darker or lighter.

[Sharpness]

[Contrast]
Specify the difference between the light and the dark. The higher contrast makes the difference bigger, and the
lower contrast smaller.
Tap to display the check mark to suppress the background density of the document to enhance the
scanned image.
[Original Size]
Select the document size to be scanned.

Note
[Add Folder]
Tap to display the check mark to create a new folder to which the scanned data is stored.
6 Scanning 127
[File Name]
Specify how to name the scanned data.

File names can be specified up to 50 characters, in the following format.
[Auto]: img-YYMMDDHHMMSS.extension
[Add Prefix]: Specified characters_YYMMDDHHMMSS.extension
[Add Suffix]: YYMMDDHHMMSS_specified characters.extension
Note
• "YYMMDDHHMMSS" stands for the last two digits of year, two digits of month and day, two digits of hour, minute, and
second.
• Prefix and suffix can be specified up to 32 characters.
• When the scanned data is stored as one page per file, or if the file name is the same with that of the existing file on the
server, "-" (hyphen) and consecutive four-digit number (0001 - 9999) are added after the file name.
• The following characters cannot be used for the file name even though they are displayed on the screen keyboard.
\/:*?"<>|
[Edge Erase]
Specify whether to remove the shadows on the top and bottom, the left and right, or the middle when scanning
a thick document or a booklet.
 Resetting or Saving the Settings

1. Tap [Scan to Network ].
128 User Guide

[Reset]
Resets the [Scan to Network] settings of the machine.
[Save as New App]
icon.
Refer
Storing to a Computer Connected to the Network (Scan to WSD)

If the machine is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can send
scanned data to a computer.
Note
• This feature is supported on the following operating systems:
- Windows® 7
- Windows® 8.1
- Windows® 10
- Windows Server® 2008
- Windows Server® 2008 R2
 Setting Up Web Services on Devices (WSD)

Checking the Machine Setting
To scan using Scan to WSD, you need to enable [WSD Scan] on the machine.

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Protocol].
6 Scanning 129
4. Make sure that the [WSD Scan] check mark is displayed.
Setting the Computer

For Windows® 7:
1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Add a device].
2. Select the machine, and then click [Next].
130 User Guide

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The machine is connected to your computer using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
Note
• You can specify how your computer acts if the computer receives the scanned data. Open [Scan properties] of this
machine on your computer, and specify the action in [Actions] under [Events] tab. For details, see the help of your
computer.
For Windows® 10:
1. Click the Start button, and then click [Settings].

2. Click [Devices].
3. Click [Printers & scanners] > [Add a printer or scanner].
6 Scanning 131
4. Select the machine, and then click [Add device].
Note
• You can specify how your computer acts if the computer receives the scanned data. Open [Scan properties] of this
machine on your computer, and specify the action in [Actions] under [Events] tab. For details, see the help of your
computer.
 Storing Scanned Data to a Computer

1. Load a document.
Refer
3. Tap [Scan to WSD].
132 User Guide

4. Tap the button under [Destination].
5. Tap the name of the computer that you want to send the scanned data to.
6. Tap the button under [Event], and then select the action after scanning.
7. Tap [Start].
Note
8. In the screen displayed on the computer that the scanned data is sent to, select the application to
receive the scanned data, and scanning starts with the selected application.
When Windows® Fax and Scan is selected, the following screen is displayed.
Note
• Depending on the settings of your computer, actions or the application that your computer takes may differ.
6 Scanning 133
6.2.2 Sending Scanned Data via E-Mail (Scan to
Email)
The Scan to Email feature allows you to send scanned data as an e-mail attachment.
Preparing for Sending an E-mail From the Machine

To send an e-mail from the machine, the following information is necessary:
• E-mail account (user account) information
• E-mail server information
 Registering the DNS Server Address in the Machine

1. Enter the IP address of the machine in your web browser and start CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
• To check the IP address of the machine, press the <Home> button on the operator panel, and then tap [Device] >
[About].
2. Click [Log In] on the upper right corner.
192.0.2.1
Note
• If [Local User] is displayed on the upper right corner, proceed to step 4.
3. Enter the [User Name] and [Password] for the administrator, and then click [Log In].
Refer
• For details about the default user name and password, see "Logging In As the Administrator (P.273)."
4. Click [Connectivity] on the left pane of the screen.
5. Click [Ethernet] in [Connections].
134 User Guide

6. Perform either of the following:
• When Acquiring the DNS Server Address Automatically:
Select the [Use DHCP to Assign Address] check box for [IPv4 DNS Servers], or select the [Use
DHCPv6-lite to Assign Address] check box for [IPv6 DNS Servers], depending on your network
environment.
• When Acquiring the DNS Server Address Manually:
Clear the [Use DHCP to Assign Address] check box for [IPv4 DNS Servers] and enter the address in
[Server Address], or clear the [Use DHCPv6-lite to Assign Address] check box for [IPv6 DNS Servers] and
enter the address in [Server Address], depending on your network environment.
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Restart Now].
9. When restarting the machine is complete, click [Refresh].
 Registering the Mail Server Settings in the Machine
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
6 Scanning 135
5. Click [POP3] in [Protocols].
6. Configure the server settings, and then click [OK].

Refer
• For details about the settings, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
9. Click [SMTP] in [Protocols].
10. Configure the server settings, and then click [OK].
Refer
Note
• To send an e-mail with SSL/TLS encryption, you need to configure the SSL/TLS settings on the machine. For details, see
"Using the Encryption Feature (P.334)."
Sending Scanned Data

1. Load a document.
Refer
136 User Guide

3. Tap [Scan to Email].
4. Enter the e-mail address for the recipient.

Note
• You can also use the address book or an LDAP server to specify the e-mail address. For details, see "Using the Address
Book (P.279)."
5. Tap the button next to , and then select the file format of the scanned data to be sent.
Refer
7. Tap [Send].
Note
Checking the Scanned Data

You can check the scanned data before sending the data. On the detailed setting screen, display the check mark
for [Preview], and then tap [Preview] on the upper right corner. When a document is scanned, the Preview screen
for the document is displayed.
Refer
 Preview Screen

[Scan Another Page]
6 Scanning 137
Note

[Send]
Sends the scanned data.
 Preview Details Screen
Switches the page to be displayed. You can also switch the page by flicking or swiping the screen to the right
or left.
data.
Note
Configuring the Settings for the Scan to Email Feature

The setting items available on Scan to Email feature are as follows.
*
[Preview] On, Off*
138 User Guide

mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390 mm) ], [16K (270 x 195
mm) ], [16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5
[Left & Right] [2]*
[Middle] [0]*
[From] [Manual Entry], [Address Book]

2. Tap [Scan to Email].
[To:]
Enter the e-mail address for the recipient.
Select an e-mail address from the address book.
6 Scanning 139
Select the file format of the scanned data to be sent.

1. Tap .
[Preview]
Tap to display the check mark to display the preview of the scanned data before sending.
[Output Color]
[Resolution]
140 User Guide

[2-Sided Scanning]
[Lighten/Darken]
[Sharpness]
[Contrast]
scanned image.
6 Scanning 141
[Original Size]

Note
[File Name]

Note
second.
• "-" (hyphen) and consecutive four-digit number (0001 - 9999) are added after the file name.
\/:*?"<>|
[Edge Erase]
142 User Guide

[From]
Specify the e-mail address for the sender.

1. Tap [Scan to Email ].
xxxxx@xxx
xxxxx
[Reset]
Resets the [Scan to Email] settings of the machine.

[Save as New App]

icon.
Refer
6 Scanning 143
6.2.3 Storing Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
(Scan to USB Drive) (Optional)
The Scan to USB feature allows you to store scanned data directly to a USB flash drive attached to the machine.
Refer
• For details about the USB flash drives you can use with the machine, see "Supported USB Flash Drive (P.86)."
1. Load a document.
Refer
4. Tap [Scan to USB Drive].
5. Tap , and then select the folder to store the scanned data.
Refer
8. Tap [Start].
Important
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the machine is accessing the drive. The data in the drive may be destroyed, or
the drive itself may be damaged and become unusable.
Note
9. Make sure that the machine is not accessing the USB flash drive, and then remove the drive from the
machine.
144 User Guide

Refer
 Preview Screen

[Scan Another Page]
Note

[Start]
Stores scanned data to a USB flash drive.
6 Scanning 145
or left.
data.
Note
Configuring the Settings for the Scan to USB Feature

The setting items available on Scan to USB feature are as follows.
*are the factory default values.
[Preview] On, Off*
mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390 mm) ], [16K (270 x 195
mm) ], [16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5
[Left & Right] [2]*
[Middle] [0]*
146 User Guide

3. Tap [Scan to USB Drive].
Select a folder to store the scanned data.
[File Format]

1. Tap .
6 Scanning 147
[Preview]
[Output Color]
[Resolution]
[2-Sided Scanning]
148 User Guide

[Lighten/Darken]
[Sharpness]
[Contrast]
scanned image.
[Original Size]
[Add Folder]
6 Scanning 149
[File Name]

Note
second.
• When the scanned data is stored as one page per file, or if the file name is the same with that of the existing file on the
server, "-" (hyphen) and consecutive four-digit number (0001 - 9999) are added after the file name.
\/:*?"<>|
[Edge Erase]

1. Tap [Scan to USB Drive ].
150 User Guide

[Reset]
Resets the [Scan to USB Drive] settings of the machine.

6 Scanning 151
6.3 Scanning From a Computer
Important
• When you scan a document from your computer, pay close attention when you move away from the machine to
operate your computer with the document loaded in the machine. If another user operates the machine by mistake with
your document loaded in the machine, this may cause a loss of the document or an information leakage. Operate your
computer as close to the machine as possible. Also, check that you have all the pages of your document in hand after
you finish scanning.
6.3.1 For Windows®

Scanning Using Print & Scan Hub
You can scan documents using the Print & Scan Hub program that is supplied with the machine.
Refer
• You need to install Print & Scan Hub. For details, see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)."
1. Load a document.
Refer
2. On your computer, click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Fuji Xerox Print & Scan Hub] > [Print & Scan Hub].
For Windows® 10, click [Start] > [Fuji Xerox Print & Scan Hub] > [Print & Scan Hub].
3. From [Device List], select the machine.
4. Click [Scan].
152 User Guide

5. Configure the scan settings on [Scan Settings] as needed.
[Output Color]
[Scanner Type]
Specify whether to place a document on the document glass, or load a document in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF).
[Resolution]
[Document Size]
[Brightness]
Select the brightness when scanning a document.
[Contrast]
Specify the difference between the light and the dark. Clicking [+] makes the difference between the light
and the dark bigger, and clicking [-] makes the difference smaller.
6. Click [Scan] to start scanning.
7. Edit the scanned data in [Edit] as needed.
[Rotate]
Rotates or inverts the image.
[Crop]
Specify the image size to be trimmed.
8. Specify the file format and the file name of the scanned data, and the location to save the scanned
data in [Save Settings].
[File Format]
[File Name]
Specify the file name of the scanned data.
[Destination]
Select the location to store the scanned data.
[Details]
Select the folder to store the scanned data.
9. Click [Save].
6 Scanning 153
Scanning Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)
If the machine is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can send
scanned data to a computer.
Note
• This feature is supported on the following operating systems:
- Windows® 7
- Windows® 8.1
- Windows® 10
 Setting Up Web Services on Devices (WSD)

Checking the Machine Setting
To scan using Scan to WSD, you need to enable [WSD Scan] on the machine.

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Protocol].

4. Make sure that the [WSD Scan] check mark is displayed.
154 User Guide

Setting the Computer
For Windows® 7:
1. Click [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Add a device].
2. Select the machine, and then click [Next].

For Windows® 10:
1. Click the Start button, and then click [Settings].
6 Scanning 155
2. Click [Devices].
3. Click [Printers & scanners] > [Add a printer or scanner].
156 User Guide

4. Select the machine, and then click [Add device].
 Scanning From a Computer

You can scan documents using the programs such as Print & Scan Hub or Windows® Fax and Scan.
1. Load a document.
Refer
2. On your computer, click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
For Windows® 10, click [Start] > [Windows System] > [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] > [Devices
and Printers].
3. Right-click the machine, and then select [Start scan].
6 Scanning 157
4. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then click [Scan].
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to store the scanned data.
Scanning Using Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver

Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) is one of the standard components provided by Windows® XP or later
operating systems. With the Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver, you can scan a document using
Microsoft® programs such as Windows® Fax and Scan or Microsoft® Paint.
Note
• Make sure that the machine is connected to a computer via a USB cable.
• You need to install the scanner driver on your computer. For details about how to install the driver, see "Installing
Software for Windows® (P.33)."
• Depending on the applications, scanning may stop if the machine receives print jobs during scanning the
multiple-paged document using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). For such applications, use the TWAIN
driver for scanning. For details on the TWAIN driver, see "Scanning Using TWAIN Driver (P.159)."
The following procedure uses Windows® Fax and Scan as an example.
Note
• You can also use the Print & Scan Hub software for scanning.
1. Load a document.
Refer
2. On your computer, start Windows® Fax and Scan.
158 User Guide

3. Click [New Scan].
4. On [Source], specify whether to scan a document placed on the document glass, or scan a document
loaded in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
Note
• If you select [Feeder (Scan one side)] or [Feeder (Scan both sides)], select the size for storing the scanned data in [Paper
size].
5. Configure the other scan settings as needed.
6. Click [Scan].
Scanning Using TWAIN Driver

With the TWAIN driver, you can import scanned data to a software such as Adobe® Photoshop®.
Note
• Make sure that the machine is connected to a computer via a USB cable.
Software for Windows® (P.33)."
The following procedure uses typical program that supports TWAIN as an example.
1. Load a document.
Refer
2. On your computer, start the graphic program that supports TWAIN.
3. Select the machine from the TWAIN menu on the graphic program, specify the necessary settings,
and then start scanning.
Refer
• For details on how to use the TWAIN driver, see the help of the TWAIN driver.
• For details about operating the graphic program, see the manual supplied with the program.
6 Scanning 159
6.3.2 For Mac
You can scan documents using Image Capture, a standard program for Mac.
Note
• When scanning from Mac, click [Connectivity] on the left pane in CentreWare Internet Services, select [AirPrintTM] in
[Mobile Printing], and make sure that the [Enable] check box is selected. Also, when the machine is connected to Mac via
USB, select the [USB Connection] check box for [AirPrintTM]. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
Software for Mac (P.35)."
1. Load a document.
Refer
2. On your computer, click [Applications] > [Image Capture] in the [Go] menu.
3. Select the machine name under [DEVICES] or [SHARED] on the left pane of the screen.
Note
• If the machine name is not displayed, position the mouse pointer to the right of [DEVICES] or [SHARED], and then click
[Show].
4. Configure the scan settings as needed.
5. Click [Scan].
Refer
• For details about how to use Image Capture, see the Image Capture help.
160 User Guide

7 Faxing (Optional)
7.1 Sending/Receiving a Fax..................................................................................... 162

7.2 Sending a Fax From a Computer (Direct Fax) ............................................ 176
7 Faxing (Optional) 161

7.1 Sending/Receiving a Fax
7.1.1 Sending a Fax
Important
• Check the destination before sending a fax.
Note
• Before using the fax function, make sure to specify a country code by tapping [Device] > [General] > [Fax Settings] >
[Country/Region]. After specifying the country code, restart the machine accordingly.
Refer
• You can check a fax transmission result by viewing the [Jobs] screen or printing a confirmation report. For details, see
"Checking Jobs (P.61)", "[Job History] (P.229)", "[Fax Activity] (P.230)."
Basic Faxing
1. Load a document.
Refer
3. Tap [Fax].
4. Tap , and then configure the fax settings as needed.
Refer
162 User Guide

5. Tap .
6. Enter the fax number for the recipient.

Note
• Pressing recalls the last dialed fax number.
• You can also use the address book or an LDAP server to specify the fax number. For details, see "Using the Address Book
(P.279)."
7. Tap [Send].
Note
• To cancel the fax job, tap [Delete Job] while sending the fax.
• When the automatic redial function is enabled, the machine redials at a specified interval of time if the line is busy or
there is no answer from the recipient. For details about the automatic redial settings, see "[Auto Redial Setup] (P.241)."
Sending a Fax Using On-Hook Dialing

1. Load a document.
Refer
3. Tap [Fax].
4. Tap , and then configure the fax settings as needed.
Refer

5. Tap .
6. Tap .
Note
• If [Original Size] is set to [Auto], is disabled and you cannot tap it. Specify the original size.
8. Tap [Send].
Note
• To cancel the fax job, tap [Delete Job] while sending the fax.
• When you send a fax using on-hook dialing, you cannot use the automatic redial function.
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time

You can specify the time to send the fax. This feature is useful for sending faxes when communication charges
are low, such as during night time.
Important
• After faxing in the delayed start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
1. Load a document.
Refer
3. Tap [Fax].
164 User Guide

4. Tap > [Delay Send] > [Specific Time].
5. Specify the start time, and then tap [OK].
6. Configure the other fax settings as needed.

Refer
7. Tap .
Note
• Pressing recalls the last dialed fax number.
• You can also use the address book or an LDAP server to specify the fax number. For details, see "Using the Address Book
(P.279)."
9. Tap [Send].
Note
Checking the Outgoing Fax

You can check the scanned data before sending the fax. On the detailed setting screen, display the check mark
Refer
 Preview Screen

[Scan Another Page]

Opens the preview details screen.
Closes the Preview screen.

[Send]
Sends the fax.
or left.
7.1.2 Receiving a Fax

Note
• When the memory is full, you cannot receive a fax automatically. Delete any fax documents you no longer need from
the memory.
• If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing, or while the machine runs out of paper or toner, the machine
stores incoming faxes in the memory. And then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or replacing the consumables,
the machine automatically starts printing the fax stored in the memory.
Receiving a Fax Automatically

To automatically receive a fax, set the fax receive mode to [FAX Mode], [TEL/FAX Mode], or [Ans/FAX Mode]. The
default setting is [FAX Mode].
Refer
• For details about the fax receive mode, see "[Receive Mode] (P.239)."
Note
• To use [TEL/FAX Mode] or [Ans/FAX Mode], connect an external telephone or an answering machine to the phone
connector on the right side of the machine.
166 User Guide

Receiving a Fax Manually
To receive a fax by using an external telephone or by operating the touch panel, set the fax receive mode to [TEL
Mode].
Refer
• For details about the fax receive mode, see "[Receive Mode] (P.239)."
Note
• To use [TEL Mode], connect an external telephone to the phone connector on the right side of the machine.
 Using Remote Receive

If an external telephone is connected to the machine, the remote receive feature enables you to receive a fax by
operating the external telephone.
Note
• To use this feature, you need to set [Remote Receive] to [On], and then register a two-digit code as [Remote Receive
Tone]. For details, see "[Remote Receive] (P.241)."
• Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.
1. When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset.

2. Make sure that you hear the fax tone, and then enter the remote receive code with the telephone.
Note
• When entering the remote receive code, press the number keys slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try entering the two-digit code again.
3. Hang up the handset.
 Using Off-Hook Dialing
1. When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset.
2. Make sure that you hear the fax tone, and then press the <Home> button.
3. Tap [Fax].
4. Tap [Receive].
5. Hang up the handset.
 Using On-Hook Dialing
1. When the external telephone rings, press the <Home> button.

2. Tap [Fax].
3. Tap .
Note
• If [Original Size] is set to [Auto], is disabled and you cannot tap it. Specify the original size.
4. Tap [Receive].
Receiving Faxes Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection

(DRPD)
The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your fax number from outside.

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [General] > [Fax Settings] > [Fax Line Settings] > [DRPD Pattern].
Note
• If [Panel Lock] is enabled, enter the passcode. For details about this setting, see "Restricting the Touch Panel Operation
(P.54)."
4. Tap the desired pattern.
Note
• The machine provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your
telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.
5. Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
Refer
• To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set [Receive Mode] to [DRPD Mode]. For details about this setting, see
"[Receive Mode] (P.239)."
Using the Secure Receiving Mode

You can configure the machine settings so that the received faxes cannot be browsed by other persons. In the
secure receiving mode, all incoming faxes are not printed immediately, and are stored in memory. By entering
the passcode specified beforehand, you can print the stored faxes.
Note
• When you clear the secure receiving mode, all the stored faxes are printed.
 Configuring the Secure Receiving Mode Settings

168 User Guide

2. Tap [Device].


7. Tap .
8. Tap [Secure Fax Receive].
9. Tap to display the check mark.

In the secure receiving mode, all incoming faxes are stored in memory. And is displayed at [Print Secure Fax]
on the [Jobs] screen to let you know that there is a fax stored.
 Printing Received Faxes

2. Tap [Jobs].
3. Tap [Print Secure Fax].

Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive them by operating this machine.
170 User Guide

2. Tap [Fax].
3. Tap .
4. Tap for [Polling Receive] to display the check mark.
5. Tap .
7. Tap [Retrieve].
7.1.3 Various Fax Features

The machine enables you to configure the settings for various fax features as needed. You can configure the
following setting items:
*
[Preview] On, Off*
[Broadcast Fax] On, Off*
[Resolution] [Standard]*, [Fine], [Superfine], [Photo]

mm) ]*, [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x 13" ], [Letter (8.5 x
11") ]
Note
• The default value for off-hook is [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ], and for other
modes, it is [Auto].
[Cover Sheet] On, Off*

[Polling Receive] On, Off*
[Delay Send] [Off]*
[Specific Time]

2. Tap [Fax].
[Enter Fax Number]

Enter the fax number for the recipient.
Select a fax number from the address book.
Recalls the last dialed fax number.
172 User Guide

Adds a pause symbol "-" to the fax number.
If you tap and hold , a wait symbol "=" is added to the fax number. When the wait symbol "=" is added, the
machine waits for a dial tone, and then starts dialing.
Specify on-hook dialing to send or receive faxes manually.

1. Tap .
[Preview]
[Broadcast Fax]
Tap to display the check mark to send a fax to multiple recipients.
[Lighten/Darken]
Specify the density to make the outgoing fax darker or lighter.
[2-Sided Scanning]

[Resolution]
Select the image quality when scanning a document.
[Standard] Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

[Fine] Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines.
[Superfine] Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. Enabled only when
the remote fax machine also supports this mode.
[Photo] Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
[Original Size]
Select the document size to be sent.
[Cover Sheet]
Tap to display the check mark to attach a cover page to outgoing faxes.
[Polling Receive]
Tap to display the check mark to switch to the polling receive mode. You can receive faxes from the remote
fax machine by operating this machine.
[Delay Send]
Specify whether to send a fax at a specified time. Select [Specific Time] to specify the time when the fax is sent.
Note
• A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be reserved.
174 User Guide

1. Tap [Fax ].
[Reset]
Resets the [Fax] settings of the machine.

Note
• If the number of registered fax destinations is more than 31, [Save as New Default] is not displayed.
[Save as New App]

icon.
Note
• If the number of registered fax destinations is 31 or more, [Save as New App] is not displayed.
Refer

7.2 Sending a Fax From a Computer
(Direct Fax)
When you install the Printer Control Language (PCL) driver or fax driver, you can send a document created on a
program by fax directly from your computer, in the same way as you print the document. This feature is called
"Direct Fax."
Send data Send fax
PCL driver/fax driver Sending machine Receiving machine

(this machine) (fax machine/multifunction machine)
Note
• Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
• The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending
on the program you are using.
Refer
• For details about how to install the driver, see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)" or "Installing Software for Mac
(P.35)."
1. Open the file that you want to fax.

• For Windows®:
a Select the machine, and then click [Preferences].
b Select [Fax] from the [Job Type].
c Click the [Fax] tab.
Note
• When the [Fax] tab is not displayed, open [Devices and Printers] on your computer, right-click the icon for the machine to
select [Printer properties], and then select [Installed] for [Fax Kit] in [Items] in the [Installable Options] dialog box of the
[Configuration] tab. For details, see the print driver help.
176 User Guide

• For Mac:
a Select [Fax Setting].
4. Specify the fax transmission settings.

Refer
• For details about the settings, see the help of the PCL or fax driver.
• For Windows®:
• For Mac:

• For Windows®:
a Click [OK] to close the [Printing Preferences] dialog box, and then click [Print].
• For Mac:
a Click [Print].

6. Specify the destination.
Refer
• For details about how to specify the destination, see the help of the PCL or fax driver.
• For Windows®:
• For Mac:
7. Click [Start Sending].
178 User Guide

8 Using the Cloud Service Hub
8.1 Connecting to the Cloud Service Hub ........................................................... 180

8.2 Using the Cloud Service Hub ............................................................................ 182
8.3 Accessing the Cloud Service Hub From the Print & Scan Hub
(Windows®) ............................................................................................................. 199
8 Using the Cloud Service Hub 179

8.1 Connecting to the Cloud Service Hub
With the Cloud Service Hub, you can print files stored in a cloud storage service or save scanned data in a cloud
storage service. You can also send scanned data to the e-mail address used to login.
Note
• To use the Cloud Service Hub, the contract is required.
• Cloud storage services that are available in the Cloud Service Hub will differ depending on your contracts.
Box® Working
Folder
SharePoint®
Online
®
Dropbox
Evernote® OneDrive®
Google
DriveTM
8.1.1 Registering User Account

To use the Cloud Service Hub, user registration is required.
Visit the following web site and register a user account.
https://cloudservicehub.fujixerox.com
8.1.2 Logging In to the Cloud Service Hub

You can login to the Cloud Service Hub from the operator panel.
180 User Guide

2. Tap [CloudServiceHub].
3. Enter an e-mail address, and then tap [OK].
Note
• If login history is available, tap , and then select an e-mail address.
• If the check mark for [Save User ID and Password] is displayed, the machine saves the user ID and password of the user
who logs in last. When you select the user ID from the [Login History], enter the correct password to login.
4. Enter the password, and then tap [OK].
5. Tap [Log In].

8.2 Using the Cloud Service Hub
8.2.1 Printing From the Cloud Service Hub (Print
from Cloud)
Using the Print from Cloud Feature
You can print files stored in a cloud storage service from the machine.
1. Login to the Cloud Service Hub.

Refer
• For details about how to login, see "Logging In to the Cloud Service Hub (P.180)."
2. Tap [Print from Cloud], and then select a cloud storage service that contains the file you want to print.
Note
• You can search for the file to print by tapping on the [Select Cloud] screen and entering a search word.
• If favorites are already registered, the [Favorites] screen is displayed when you tap [Print from Cloud]. You can select and
use the registered setting.
Note
• Only files that are supported by the machine are displayed.
4. Tap , and then configure the print settings as needed.
Refer
• For details about the print settings, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.184)."
5. Tap [Print].
Configuring the Settings for the Print from Cloud Feature

The setting items available on Print from Cloud feature are as follows.
*
182 User Guide

[Quantity] [1]* - [99]
[Output Color] [Color]*, [Black & White]
mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4
(210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182
mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5
(148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x
14") ], [8.5 x 13" ], [Letter (8.5 x
11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]

- 89 gsm)], [Covers (106 - 169 gsm)],
89 gsm)], [Colored (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Tray 1]*
[Tray 2]
[PDF Password]
To configure the settings, tap the desired setting item on the [Print from Cloud] screen.
Select the file that you want to print.
Displays the preview image of a file.

1. Tap .
[Quantity]
[Output Color]
[Paper Trays]

[Tray 1]
[Tray 2]*
184 User Guide

[2-Sided Printing]
[Layout]
[PDF Password]
Enter the password to open the secured PDF.
[Image Type]
[Auto] Prints PDF/TIFF files in the [Text] mode and JPEG files
in the [Photos (Standard Quality)] mode.

[Collation]
multiple page file.


To reset or save the settings, tap [Print from Cloud ].
[Reset]
Resets the [Print from Cloud] settings of the machine.
[Save as Favorite]
Registers the current settings and the folder that stores the files as favorites.
Note
• You can register up to five settings.
8.2.2 Saving Scanned Data in a Cloud Storage

Service (Scan to Cloud)
Using the Scan to Cloud Feature
You can store the scanned data on the machine to a cloud storage service.
1. Load a document.
Refer
Refer
186 User Guide

3. Tap [Scan to Cloud], and then select a cloud storage service you want to save the scanned data to.
Note
• You can search for the folder you want to save the scanned data to by tapping on the [Select Cloud] screen and
entering a search word.
• If favorites are already registered, the [Favorites] screen is displayed when you tap [Scan to Cloud]. You can select and
use the registered setting.
4. Select a folder, and then tap [OK].

Refer
• For details about the scan settings, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.190)."
6. Tap [Start].
Note

Refer
 Preview Screen

[Scan Another Page]
Note
Closes the preview.

[Start]
You can store the scanned data to a cloud storage service.
or left.
data.
Note
Configuring the Settings for the Scan to Cloud Feature

The setting items available on Scan to Cloud feature are as follows.
*
188 User Guide

[File Format] [PDF]*, [JPEG], file formats available on the server
[Preview] On, Off*
[Sharpness] [More], [Normal]*, [Less]
[Contrast] [More], [Normal]*, [Less]
mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390 mm) ], [16K (270 x 195
mm) ], [16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x
13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
[Left & Right] [2]*
[Middle] [0]*
To configure the settings, tap the desired setting item on the [Scan to Cloud] screen.
Select the location to store the scanned data.
[File Name]
Specify the file name of the scanned data.
[File Format]
[Tag]
Enter the tag for the scanned data.
Note
• This function cannot be used depending on the cloud storage service you are using.

1. Tap .
[Preview]
[Output Color]
[Resolution]
[2-Sided Scanning]
190 User Guide

[Lighten/Darken]
[Sharpness]
[Contrast]
scanned image.
[Original Size]

Note

[File Name]

Note
second.
• When the scanned data is stored as one page per file, "-" (hyphen) and consecutive four-digit number (0001 - 9999) are
added after the file name.
\/:*?"<>|
[Edge Erase]

To reset or save the settings, tap [Scan to Cloud ].
[Reset]
Resets the [Scan to Cloud] settings of the machine.
[Save as Favorite]
Registers the current settings and the folder to save the scanned data to as favorites.
Note
• You can register up to ten settings.
8.2.3 Sending Scanned Data to an E-mail Address

(Scan to Me)
You can send the scanned data to the e-mail address used to login to the Cloud Service Hub.
192 User Guide

Using the Scan to Me Feature
1. Load a document.
Refer
Refer
3. Tap [Scan to Me].
Note
• If favorites are already registered, the [Favorites] screen is displayed when you tap [Scan to Me]. You can select and use
the registered setting.
4. Tap [Subject] to enter an e-mail subject, and then tap [OK].

Refer
• For details about the scan settings, see "Configuring the Detailed Settings (P.196)."
6. Tap [Send].

You can check the scanned data before sending the data. On the detailed setting screen, display the check mark
Refer

 Preview Screen

[Scan Another Page]
Note
Closes the preview.

[Send]
Sends the scanned data.
or left.
194 User Guide

data.
Note
Configuring the Settings for the Scan to Me Feature

The setting items available on Scan to Me feature are as follows.
*
[File Format] [PDF]*, [JPEG], file formats available on the server

[Preview] On, Off*
[Sharpness] [More], [Normal]*, [Less]
[Contrast] [More], [Normal]*, [Less]
mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390 mm) ], [16K (270 x 195
mm) ], [16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x
13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
[Left & Right] [2]*
[Middle] [0]*
To configure the settings, tap the desired setting item on the [Scan to Me] screen.
[Subject]
Enter the e-mail subject.

[File Format]
Select the file format of the scanned data to be sent.

1. Tap .
[Preview]
[Output Color]
[Resolution]
[2-Sided Scanning]
196 User Guide

[Lighten/Darken]
[Sharpness]
[Contrast]
scanned image.
[Original Size]

[Edge Erase]

To reset or save the settings, tap [Scan to Me ].
[Reset]
Resets the [Scan to Me] settings of the machine.
[Save as Favorite]
Registers the current settings as favorites.
Note
• You can register up to ten settings.
198 User Guide

8.3 Accessing the Cloud Service Hub
From the Print & Scan Hub
(Windows®)
You can access the Cloud Service Hub from the Print & Scan Hub software included on the "Software/Product
Manual" disc.
Note
• To use the Cloud Service Hub, the contract is required.
• Cloud storage services that are available in the Cloud Service Hub will differ depending on your contracts.
• To use the Cloud Service Hub, user registration is required.
Visit the following web site and register a user account.
https://cloudservicehub.fujixerox.com
Refer
• For details about the Print & Scan Hub, see "Using Software Supplied With the Machine (P.274)."
• For details about how to install the Print & Scan Hub, see "Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)."
While you are logged in to the Cloud Service Hub, you can save scanned data to cloud storage services. You can
also open and print files stored in a cloud storage service with a corresponding application.
8.3.1 Displaying the Cloud Service Hub Screen

1. Click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Fuji Xerox Print & Scan Hub] > [Print & Scan Hub].
2. Click [Cloud Service Hub].
3. Enter the user name and password, and then click [Login].

9 Printing and Scanning From
Smartphones or Tablets
9.1 Connecting the Machine to Smartphones/Tablets .................................. 201

9.2 Printing and Scanning Using Print Utility .................................................... 206
9.3 Using Other Print Services.................................................................................. 207
200 User Guide

9.1 Connecting the Machine to
Smartphones/Tablets
You can connect the machine directly to your mobile devices, such as smartphones or tablets, and then you can
print or scan documents, photos, web pages, or e-mails quickly and easily.
Connect the machine to mobile devices in either of the following methods:
• Via Wireless Network
Connect the machine and the mobile device using an access point or wireless router.
• Via Wi-Fi Direct

Connect the machine and the mobile device directly without using an access point or wireless router.
9.1.1 Via Wireless Network

Setting Up the Machine
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the wireless network.
Refer
• For details about connecting to the wireless network, see "Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.26)."
Setting Up the Mobile Devices

Note
• The procedure varies depending on the model of the mobile device. For details, see the manual supplied with the mobile
device.
1. Enable the Wi-Fi function of the mobile device.

2. Select the network (SSID) that the machine is connected to.
3. Enter the passphrase, and then establish the wireless connection.
Note
• A passphrase may be printed on the exterior of a access point or wireless router. For details, see the manual supplied
with the access point or wireless router.
9.1.2 Via Wi-Fi Direct

Note
• You can connect up to three mobile devices.
9 Printing and Scanning From Smartphones or Tablets 201

Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct
To use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to first configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator panel of the machine.
When you select the SSID of the machine on the display of the mobile device and then enter the specified
passphrase, the mobile device will be connected to the machine via Wi-Fi Direct.
 Setting Up the Machine

Note
• You can also use CentreWare Internet Services to specify the machine. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services
Help.
• Wi-Fi Direct cannot be used in an IPv6 or Ad-hoc environment.

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct].
4. Tap for [Wi-Fi Direct] to display the check mark.
202 User Guide

6. After the machine is restarted, tap [Device] > [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group Role] >
[Group Owner].
7. Tap [Paired Device].

8. Make sure that the number of mobile devices shown on the screen is two or less, and then tap .
Note
• When three mobile devices are connected to the machine, you cannot add another mobile device to the Wi-Fi Direct
network. Disconnect all the mobile devices currently connected to the machine. For details, see "Disconnecting the
Mobile Device From the Wi-Fi Direct Network (P.203)."
9. Tap [SSID].
10. Change the SSID as necessary, and then tap [OK].
Note
• When the SSID is changed, the mobile devices shown on the screen in step 8 above are disconnected.
11. Tap [Passphrase].
12. Check the passphrase, and then tap .
Note
• When you tap [Print Passphrase] under the [Passphrase] menu, you can print a sheet on which the passphrase is written.
 Connecting Mobile Devices to the Machine

Refer
• For details, see the manual supplied with the mobile device.
1. Enable the wireless LAN function of the mobile device.

2. Select the SSID of the machine.
3. Enter the passphrase.
Disconnecting the Mobile Device From the Wi-Fi Direct Network

2. Tap [Device].

3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Paired Device].
Note
• [Paired Device] is displayed when a mobile device is connected to the machine via Wi-Fi Direct.
4. Tap [Disconnect All].
5. Tap [Disconnect Now] or [Disconnect and Reset Passphrase].
6. When the confirmation message is displayed, tap [Yes].
Resetting the Passphrase

Note
• Resetting the passphrase will disconnect the mobile device.

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct].

4. Tap [Passphrase].
204 User Guide

5. Tap [Reset Passphrase] > [Yes].
Mobile devices are disconnected, and the new passphrase is displayed.
Resetting the PIN Code

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [WPS Setup].
4. Tap [PIN Code] > [Reset PIN Code].

9.2 Printing and Scanning Using Print
Utility
Print Utility is a free program for the smartphones and tablets. You can print from or scan a document to your
iOS or Android mobile device. When your Android mobile device supports the NFC function, waving your device
over the NFC reader of the machine starts printing or scanning.
For details, visit the following web sites:
• For iOS: http://www.fxap.com.sg/product/software/printutilios/
• For Android: http://www.fxap.com.sg/product/software/printutilandroid/
206 User Guide

9.3 Using Other Print Services
9.3.1 AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing service offered by Apple Inc. Without installing the print drivers or special
programs, you can print the documents specified on iOS devices such as iPad or iPhone, or on Mac.
Note
Enabling the AirPrint Setting

1. Enter the IP address for the machine in your web browser and start CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
• To check the IP address for the machine, press the <Home> button on the operator panel, and then tap [Device] >
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer

5. Click [AirPrintTM] in [Mobile Printing].
6. Select the [Enable] check box.

Note
• When you use the AirPrint feature with a USB connection, select the [USB Connection] check box in [AirPrintTM].
7. Click [OK].
Printing With AirPrint

The following procedure uses iOS 9 as an example.
1. Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.
2. Tap the action icon .
3. Tap [Print].
4. Select the machine and set machine options.
5. Tap [Print].
9.3.2 Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service offered by Google Inc. By registering the machine to Google Cloud Print,
you can print from various programs supported by Google Cloud Print.
Note
• Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection.
• If the machine is connected to a network via a proxy server, you need to configure the settings on [Proxy Server] on
CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
Refer
• Visit "https://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/" for details about Google Cloud Print.
208 User Guide

Preparing to Use the Machine With Google Cloud Print
To use Google Cloud Print, you need to prepare the following in advance:
• Acquire a Google account.
• Enable Google Cloud Print on the operator panel.
a Press the <Home> button.
b Tap [Device].
c Tap [Network Settings] > [Protocol].

d Tap for [Google Cloud Print] to display the check mark.
e Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again.
Registering the Machine to Google Cloud Print

Use CentreWare Internet Services or Google Chrome to register the machine to Google Cloud Print.
 Registering Using CentreWare Internet Services

Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note

Refer
5. Click [Google Cloud Print] in [Mobile Printing].
6. Click [Printer Registration] > [Register] > [Continue].

A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud Print registration web site is printed.
7. Enter the URL written on the sheet to visit the Google Cloud Print registration web site.
Note
• You can scan the QR code printed on the sheet to visit the registration site.
8. Enter your Google account on the login screen.
9. Click [Finish printer registration] > [Manage your printers].
The machine is listed in the [Printers] list and ready for use with the Google Cloud Print service.
 Registering Using Google Chrome

Note
• Make sure that [Bonjour (mDNS)] is enabled. For details about the settings, see "[Protocol] (P.247)."
1. Open the Google Chrome browser.

2. Click in the upper right corner, and then select [Settings].
3. Click [Show advanced settings] in the bottom of the page.
4. Click [Google Cloud Print] > [Manage].
Note
• If a message is displayed under [New Devices] to sign in to Chrome, click [sign in] and sign in to Chrome.
5. Click [Register] for the machine that you want to register.
6. When the window to confirm the registration appears, click [Register].
210 User Guide

8. Make sure that the machine name appears in [My devices].
Note
• It may take about 5 minutes or more until the machine name appears in [My devices].
Canceling the Registration to Google Cloud Print

Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
5. Click [Google Cloud Print] in [Mobile Printing].
6. Click [Printer Registration] > [Unregister].
Printing With Google Cloud Print

Refer
• Visit "https://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/" for details about the programs that support printing with Google Cloud
Print, or the procedure for printing.
9.3.3 Mopria® Print Service

Mopria Print Service allows any Android phone or tablet (Android version 4.4 or later) to connect and print to
Mopria-certified printers without additional setup.
Firstly, download the Mopria Print Service application from the Google Play store and install it on your Android
mobile device.

In order to print, connect your mobile device to the same network as the machine or use the Wi-Fi Direct
functionality to connect your mobile device to the machine.
Note
Setting Up Mopria Print Service on the Machine

Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
212 User Guide

5. Click [Mopria] in [Mobile Printing].
6. Click [On] > [OK].
Printing With Mopria Print Service

Refer
• Visit "http://mopria.org/" for details.

10 Changing the Machine
Settings
10.1 Understanding the Machine Setting Menus .............................................. 215

10.2 [Language]............................................................................................................... 227
10.3 [About]....................................................................................................................... 228
10.4 [Information Pages] ............................................................................................. 229
10.5 [Trays]......................................................................................................................... 231
10.6 [Supplies] .................................................................................................................. 233
10.7 [Billing Meters] ....................................................................................................... 234
10.8 [General] ................................................................................................................... 235
10.9 [Network Settings] ................................................................................................ 243
10.10 [App Defaults]......................................................................................................... 249
10.11 [Security Settings] ................................................................................................. 255
10.12 [Maintenance] ........................................................................................................ 260
10.13 [Advanced Settings] ............................................................................................. 263
214 User Guide

10.1 Understanding the Machine
Setting Menus
This section describes the setting items that can be accessed by tapping [Device] on the [Home] screen.

2. Tap [Device].
[Language] You can select the language used on the machine.

[About] You can check your machine information, including the model name, IP
address, and serial number for the machine. Fax number is also displayed on
the model with the fax function.
[Information Pages] You can print the various reports and lists.
[Trays] You can specify the size and type of paper loaded in Tray 1, Tray 5 (bypass), or
Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (optional).
[Supplies] You can check the status of consumables.
[Billing Meters] You can check the total number of printed pages.
[General] You can configure the general settings for the machine, such as date, time, or
sound.
[Network Settings] You can configure the network settings.
[App Defaults] You can configure the default settings for the copy, fax, and scan functions,
and the USB Direct Print feature.
[Security Settings] You can configure the security settings, such as limiting access to the setting
menus or functions.
[Maintenance] You can configure the maintenance settings, such as adjusting the transfer
unit and initializing the non-volatile (NV) memory.
[Advanced Settings] You can customize the settings in accordance with the setting environment,
or your preferences.
10 Changing the Machine Settings 215

You can configure the following setting items:
*
[Language]
(P.227)
[About] (P.228)
[Information [System Settings], [Panel Settings], [PCL Fonts List], [PCL Macros List], [PDF Fonts List], [Job History], [Error
Pages] (P.229) History], [Printer Meter], [Demo Page], [Protocol Monitor], [Address Book], [Server Address], [Fax Activity],
[Fax Pending List], [Stored Documents List]
[Trays] (P.231) [Bypass Tray] [Use Driver On*, Off

Setting]
[Paper Size] [A3 (297 x 420 mm) ], [B4 (257 x 364 mm) ], [A4
(297 x 210 mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ], [B5 (257 x
182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257 mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210
mm) ], [8K (270 x 390 mm) ], [16K (270 x 195
mm) ], [16K (195 x 270 mm) ], [11 x 17" ],
[Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x 13" ], [Letter (8.5 x
11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Custom Paper Size]
[Paper Type] [Plain (60 - 90 gsm)], [Plain Reload], [Bond (91 - 105 gsm)],
[Bond Reload], [Recycled (60 - 89 gsm)], [Recycled Reload],
[Prepunched (60 - 89 gsm)], [Letterhead (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Covers (106 - 169 gsm)], [Covers Reload], [Covers Thick (170 -
256 gsm)], [Covers Thick Reload], [Coated (106 - 169 gsm)],
[Coated Reload], [Coated Thick (170 - 256 gsm)], [Coated
Thick Reload], [Labels (106 - 256 gsm)], [Preprinted (60 - 89
gsm)], [Colored (60 - 89 gsm)], [Postcard], [Postcard Reload],
[Envelope]
[Display Tray On*, Off

Prompt]
[Tray 1] [Paper Size]
[Paper Type] [Plain (60 - 90 gsm)], [Plain Reload], [Recycled (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Recycled Reload], [Prepunched (60 - 89 gsm)], [Letterhead (60
- 89 gsm)], [Preprinted (60 - 89 gsm)],[Colored (60 - 89 gsm)]

Prompt]
[Tray 2] [Auto Detect] On*, Off
[Paper Size] / [Custom Paper Size]
[Paper Type] [Plain (60 - 90 gsm)], [Plain Reload], [Bond (91 - 105 gsm)],
[Bond Reload], [Recycled (60 - 89 gsm)], [Recycled Reload],
[Prepunched (60 - 89 gsm)], [Letterhead (60 - 89 gsm)],
[Covers (106 - 169 gsm)], [Covers Reload], [Covers Thick (170 -
256 gsm)], [Covers Thick Reload], [Coated (106 - 169 gsm)],
[Coated Reload], [Coated Thick (170 - 256 gsm)], [Coated
Thick Reload], [Labels (106 - 256 gsm)], [Preprinted (60 - 89
gsm)], [Colored (60 - 89 gsm)]

Prompt]
[Tray Priority] [First] [Tray 5 (Bypass)]*, [Tray 1], [Tray 2]
[Second] [Tray 5 (Bypass)], [Tray 1]*, [Tray 2]
216 User Guide

[Third] [Tray 5 (Bypass)], [Tray 1], [Tray 2]*
[Supplies] (P.233)
[Billing Meters] [Meter 1]

(P.234)
[Meter 2]
[Meter 3]
[Meter 4]
[General] (P.235) [Date & Time] [Time Zone] [Africa], [Americas], [Antarctica], [Asia], [Atlantic Ocean],
[Australia], [Europe], [Indian Ocean], [Pacific Ocean]
[Date]
[Time]
[Display [1], [2], [3], [4], [5]*, [6], [7], [8], [9], [10]
Brightness]
[Sounds] [Enable Sound] On* [Select] [0], [1]*, [2], [3]

[Invalid] [0], [1]*, [2], [3]
[Copy \ Print] [0], [1], [2]*, [3]
[Fax Print] [0], [1], [2]*, [3]
[Fax Sent] [0], [1], [2]*, [3]
[Secure Print [0], [1], [2]*, [3]

Received]
[Login \ Logout] [0], [1]*, [2], [3]
[Error \ Fault] [0], [1], [2]*, [3]
[Out of Paper] [0], [1], [2]*, [3]
[Near Life End [0], [1], [2]*, [3]

(Consumables)]
[Auto Clear Alert] [0]*, [1], [2], [3]
[Device Ready] [0], [1], [2]*, [3]
[Recovered from [0], [1], [2]*, [3]

Error]
[Power Off] [0], [1], [2]*, [3]
Off
[NFC] [Enable]*, [Disable]
[Status LED (Blue)] [Enable]*, [Disable]
[Power Saver] [Low Power Timer] [1]*
[Sleep Timer] [0]*

[Timers] [Auto Clear] [45 Seconds]*, [1 Minute], [2 Minutes], [3 Minutes], [4
Minutes]
[Fault Timeout] [Off]
[On] [60]*
[Units] [Millimeters]*, [Inches]

[Original Size [Original Size [A/B Series (8K/16K)]*, [Inch Series]
Detected] Settings]
[Switch Original [8.5 x 13"], [8.5 x 14"]*

Size 1]
[Switch Original [B5]*, [16K]

Size 2]
[Check Document [On]*, [Off]

Guide]
[Default Paper [A4 (210 x 297 mm)]*, [Letter (8.5 x 11")]

Size]
[Fax Settings] [Fax Number]
[Country/Region]
[Company Name]
[Fax Line Settings] [Line Type] [PSTN]*, [PBX]
[Line Monitor Tone [None], [Soft]*, [Normal], [Loud]

Volume]
[DRPD Pattern] [Pattern 1], [Pattern 2], [Pattern 3],

[Pattern 4]*, [Pattern 5], [Pattern 6],
[Pattern 7]
[External Phone [Low], [Normal]*, [High]

Hook Threshold]
[Off Hook Wake [Off]*, [On]

Up]
[Incoming Fax [Receive Mode] [TEL Mode], [FAX Mode]*, [TEL/FAX

Settings] Mode], [Ans/FAX Mode], [DRPD Mode]
[Ring Tone [None], [Soft], [Normal]*, [Loud]

Volume]
[Auto Answer [FAX Mode] [0]*

Setup]
[TEL/FAX Mode] [6]*
[Ans/FAX Mode] [21]*

[Junk Fax Filter] [Off]*, [On]
[Forward Settings] [Off]*
[Forward] [Forwarding
Number]
[Print and [Forwarding

Forward] Number]
[Forward to Email]
[Print and Email]
[Forward to Server]
[Print & Fwd to Server]
[Receive Size] [Auto]*, [A4], [A4/B4], [A4/B4/A3]
218 User Guide

[2-Sided Printing] [Off]*, [On]
[Remote Receive] [Off]*
[On] [Remote Receive

Tone]
[Auto Reduction] [Off (Split Image)]*, [Off (Crop to Fit)],
[On]
[Outgoing Fax [Auto Redial [Number of [3]*
Settings] Setup] Redials]
[Redial Interval] [1]*
[Interval Timer] [8]*
[Dial Type] [PB]*, [DP (10pps)], [DP (20pps)]

[Prefix Dial] [Off]*, [On]
[Cover Sheet] [Off]*, [On]
[Send Header] [Off], [On]*
[ECM] [Off], [On]*
[Modem Speed] [2.4 Kbps], [4.8 Kbps], [9.6 Kbps], [14.4

Kbps], [33.6 Kbps]*
[Display Manual [Off], [On]*

Fax Recipient]
[Fax Reports] [Fax Activity] [Auto Print]*, [Manual Print]
[Fax Transmit] [Print Always], [Print On Error]*, [Print

Disabled]
[Fax Broadcast] [Print Always]*, [Print On Error], [Print

Disabled]
[Protocol Monitor] [Print Always], [Print On Error], [Print

Disabled]*
[Email Settings] [Max Email Size] [2048]*

[Network [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup [Enter SSID] [Infrastructure] [No Encryption]*,
Settings] (P.243) Wizard] [Mixed mode PSK],
[WPA2-PSK-AES],
[WEP]
[Ad hoc] [No Encryption],

[WEP]
[WPS] [Connect via PIN]
[IP Mode] [Dual Stack]*, [IPv4], [IPv6]
[TCP/IP] [IP Addressing] [DHCP/AutoIP]*, [BOOTP], [RARP],

[DHCP], [Manual Input]
[IP Address]
[Subnet Mask]
[Gateway Address]
[Disable IPsec]
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

[Wi-Fi Direct] [Wi-Fi Direct] Off*, On
[Group Role] [Auto], [Group Owner]*
[Device Name]
[Paired Device] [Disconnect All] [Disconnect Now], [Disconnect and

Reset Passphrase]
[SSID]
[Passphrase] [Reset Passphrase], [Print Passphrase]
[WPS Setup] [Push Button Configuration]
[PIN Code] [Reset PIN Code], [Print PIN Code]
[Ethernet] [IP Mode] [Dual Stack]*, [IPv4], [IPv6]
[TCP/IP] [IP Addressing] [DHCP/AutoIP]*, [BOOTP], [RARP],

[DHCP], [Manual Input]
[IP Address]
[Subnet Mask]
[Gateway Address]
[Modem Speed] [Auto]*, [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full], [100BASE-TX Half],

[100BASE-TX Full], [1000BASE-TX Full]
[Disable IPsec]
[Protocol] [LPD] Off, On*
[Port 9100] Off, On*
[FTP] Off*, On
[IPP] Off, On*
[WSD Print] Off, On*
[WSD Scan] Off, On*
[SNMP UDP] Off, On*
[StatusMessenger] Off, On*

[Internet Services] Off, On*
[Bonjour (mDNS)] Off, On*
[Telnet] Off*, On
[Update Address Off, On*
Book]
[HTTP - SSL/TLS] Off*, On
[Google Cloud Off, On*

Print]
[Other] [IPv4 Filter] [Disable]*, [Enable]
[IPv6 Filter] [Disable]*, [Enable]
[Disable IEEE 802.1x]
[Reset Network Settings]
[Delete All Certificates]
220 User Guide

[App Defaults] [Copy Settings] [Output Color] [Auto], [Color], [Black & White]*
(P.249)
[Paper Trays] [Auto]*, [Bypass], [Tray 1], [Tray 2]
[Collation] [Auto]*, [Collated], [Uncollated]
[Reduce/Enlarge] [Auto %]*, [100%], [50% (A3→A5)], [70% (A3→A4,

B4→B5)], [81% (B4→A4, B5→A5)], [86% (A3→B4,
A4→B5)], [115% (B4→A3, B5→A4)], [122% (A4→B4,
A5→B5)], [141% (A4→A3, B5→B4)], [200% (A5→A3)]
Note
• Zoom ratio can be manually specified in the range
of 25 to 400%.
[Original Size] [Auto]*, [A3 (297 x 420 mm) ], [B4 (257 x 364
mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297
mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [16K (270 x 195 mm) ], [16K (195 x 270
mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x
13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
[Original Type] [Text & Photo]*, [Text], [Photo]
[Lighten/Darken] [Lighten +3], [Lighten +2], [Lighten +1], [Normal]*, [Darken

+1], [Darken +2], [Darken +3]

Suppression]
[Color Balance] [Yellow] [Shadows] [0]*
[Midtones] [0]*
[Highlights] [0]*
[Magenta] [Shadows] [0]*
[Midtones] [0]*
[Highlights] [0]*
[Cyan] [Shadows] [0]*
[Midtones] [0]*
[Highlights] [0]*
[Black] [Shadows] [0]*

[Midtones] [0]*
[Highlights] [0]*
[2-Sided] [1→1 Sided]*
[1→2 Sided] [Long Edge Binding], [Short Edge

Binding]

Binding]

Binding]
[2-Up] [Off]*, [Auto]
[Left & Right] [2]*
[Middle] [0]*
[Number Of Cards] [1 Card]*, [2 Cards]

[Fax Settings] [Preview] On, Off*
[Resolution] [Standard]*, [Fine], [Superfine], [Photo]
[2-Sided [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided, Long Edge Bind], [2-Sided, Short Edge

Scanning] Bind]

mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297 mm) ]*, [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x
13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
Note
• The default value for off-hook is [A4 (210 x 297
mm) ], and for other modes is [Auto].
[Delay Send] 21:00*
[Scan Settings] [File Format] [PDF]*, [Multi Page TIFF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XDW(DocuWorks)]
[Preview] On, Off*
mm) ], [A4 (297 x 210 mm) ], [A4 (210 x 297
mm) ], [B5 (257 x 182 mm) ], [B5 (182 x 257
mm) ], [A5 (148 x 210 mm) ], [8K (270 x 390
mm) ], [16K (270 x 195 mm) ], [16K (195 x 270
mm) ], [11 x 17" ], [Legal (8.5 x 14") ], [8.5 x
13" ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ], [Letter (8.5 x 11") ]
[2-Sided [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided, Long Edge Bind], [2-Sided, Short Edge

Scanning] Bind]


Suppression]
[Left & Right] [2]*
222 User Guide

[Middle] [0]*
[Direct Print [Output Color] [Color]*, [Black & White]

Settings]
[Paper Trays] [Bypass], [Tray 1]*, [Tray 2]
[2-Sided Printing] [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided, Long Edge Bind], [2-Sided, Short Edge
Bind]
[Image Type] [Auto]*, [Photos (Standard Quality)], [Photos (High Quality)],

[Text]
[PDF Password]
[Security [Panel Lock] [Panel Lock [Off]*, [On]

Settings] (P.255) Settings]
[Change Passcode]
[Service Lock] [Customize Home [Unlock]*, [Disable Service]

and App]
[Copy] [Unlock]*, [Color Disabled], [Disable Service]
[Scan to Email] [Unlock]*, [Disable Service]
[Fax] [Unlock]*, [Disable Service]
[Scan to Network] [Unlock]*, [Disable Service]
[Scan to WSD] [Unlock]*, [Disable Service]
[Scan to USB [Unlock]*, [Disable Service]

Drive]
[USB Direct Print] [Unlock]*, [Color Disabled], [Disable Service]
[Menu when USB [On]*, [Off]

is inserted]
[PC Scan] [Unlock]*, [Lock with Passcode], [Disable Service]
[Direct Fax] [Unlock]*, [Lock with Passcode], [Disable Service]
[User [Disable]*, [Local Authentication]

Authentication]
[Secure Fax [Secure Fax [Off]*, [On]

Receive] Receive]
[Change Passcode]
[Copy Accounting] [Off]*, [On]
[Print Accounting] [Print Accounting] [Off]*, [On]
[Unauthenticated [Disable]*, [Enable]

User Print]
[Auto Color To [Off]*, [On]

Mono Print]

[Edit Email From [Enable]*, [Disable]
Field]
[Confirm [Off]*, [On]

Recipients]
[Domain Filtering] [On], [Off]*
[Software [Enable]*, [Disable]

Download]
[Login Attempts] [Off]*, [On]
[Security Warning] [On]*, [Off]
[Maintenance] [Adjust Paper [Plain] [Lightweight]*, [Heavyweight]

(P.260) Type]
[Labels] [Lightweight], [Heavyweight]*
[Adjust Transfer [0]*

Belt Unit]
[Adjust 2nd BTR] [Plain (60 - 90 [0]*

gsm)]
[Bond (91 - 105 [0]*

gsm)]
[Recycled (60 - 89 [0]*

gsm)]
[Covers (106 - 169 [0]*

gsm)]
[Covers Thick (170 [0]*

- 256 gsm)]
[Coated (106 - [0]*

169 gsm)]
[Coated Thick [0]*

(170 - 256 gsm)]
[Labels (106 - 256 [0]*

gsm)]
[Postcard] [0]*
[Envelope] [0]*
[Image Position] [Lead/Side [Tray 5 (Bypass)] [Lead Regi (L)] [0]*

Registration]
[Side Regi (S)] [0]*
[Tray 1] [Lead Regi (L)] [0]*

[Tray 2] [Lead Regi (L)] [0]*

[Duplex Module] [Lead Regi (L)] [0]*
[Perpendicularity] [0]*
224 User Guide

[Adjust Color [Auto Registration]
Registration]
[Quick Density Adjust]
[Calibration]
[Initialize NVM] [Fax Settings], [Scan Settings], [User Account Settings], [User App Settings],
[System Settings], [Address Book]
[Initialize Print Meter]
[Clear Stored Jobs] [All Documents], [Secure Print], [Sample Set]
[Non-Genuine [Disable]*, [Enable]

Toner]
[Adjust Altitude] [0m]*, [1000m], [2000m], [3000m], [4000m], [5000m]
[Delete Job History]
[Advanced [PCL Settings] [Paper Trays] [Auto]*, [Bypass], [Tray 1], [Tray 2]
Settings] (P.263)
[Output Size] [A3 (297 x 420 mm)], [B4 (257 x 364 mm)], [A4 (210 x 297
mm)]*, [B5 (182 x 257 mm)], [A5 (148 x 210 mm)], [8K (270 x
390 mm)], [16K (195 x 270 mm)], [11 x 17"], [Legal (8.5 x
14")], [8.5 x 13"], [Letter (8.5 x 11")], [Custom Paper Size]
[Original [Portrait]*, [Landscape]

Orientation]
[2-Sided] [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided, Long Edge Bind], [2-Sided, Short Edge

Bind]
[Font] [Courier]*
[Symbol Set] [ROMAN-8]*
[Font Size] [12]*
[Font Pitch] [10]*
[Form Line] [64]*
[Quantity] [1]*
[Image Enhance] [Off], [On]*

[Hex Dump] [Disable]*, [Enable]
[Draft Mode] [Off]*, [On]
[Line Termination] [Off]*, [Add LF], [Add CR], [CR-XX]
[Output Color] [Black & White]*, [Color]
[Ignore Form [Off]*, [On]

Feed]
[PDF Settings] [Quantity] [1]*
[2-Sided] [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided, Long Edge Bind], [2-Sided, Short Edge

Bind]
[Print Mode] [Normal]*, [Fine], [High Speed]
[PDF Password]
[Collation] [Collated], [Uncollated]*

[Output Size] [A4]*, [Auto]
[Layout] [1-Up]*, [Off (No Scaling)], [Booklet Creation], [2-Up], [4-Up]
[PDF Default [Color (Auto)]*, [Black & White]

Color]
[Detect Job [Off], [On]*

Separator]
[USB Port Settings] [Port Status] [Disable], [Enable]*
[Fixed Port] [Off]*, [On]
[Job Timeout] [Off]

[On] [30]*
[Copy Settings] [BackgroundSuppr [Lower], [Normal]*, [Higher (+1)], [Higher (+2)], [Higher (+3)]
essionLevel]
[Output Color [More Black & White], [Black & White], [Normal]*, [Color],
Recognition] [More Color]
[Scan Settings] [BackgroundSuppr [Normal]*, [High], [Higher]

essionLevel]
[TIFF Format] [TIFF V6], [TTN2]*
[Quality/File Size] [Low Quality/Small Size], [Standard Quality/Normal Size]*,

[High Quality/Large Size]
[Output Settings] [RAM Disk] [Disable]
[Enable] 100 MB*
[Print ID] [Off]*, [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], [Bottom Right]
[Print Text] [Off], [On]*
[Substitute Tray] [Off]*, [Larger Size], [Nearest Size], [Use Tray 5 (Bypass)]
[A4/Letter Switch] [Auto], [Off]*
[Banner Sheet] [Insert Position] [Off]*, [Front], [Back], [Front & Back]
[Paper Trays] [Bypass], [Tray 1]*, [Tray 2]
[Report 2-Sided [1-Sided]*, [2-Sided]

Print]
[Letterhead [Off]*, [On]

2-Sided Print]
[Low Toner Alert [Off], [On]*

Message]
[End of Drum Life] [Cancel Printing]*, [Continue Printing]
[Job History] [Print Disabled]*, [Auto Print]
[LDAP Address [Off]*, [On], [On (Fax Only)], [On (Email Only)]
Book]
[Optional Apps] [Disable], [Enable]*
226 User Guide

10.2 [Language]
You can select the display language.

10.3 [About]
You can check the information such as model name, IP address, and serial number of the machine.
Fax number is also displayed on the model with the fax function.
228 User Guide

10.4 [Information Pages]
You can print the following reports and lists.

Tap for the name of the desired report or list.
Note
• Some of the menus are displayed only on the model with the fax function.
[System Settings]
Prints a list of information on machine settings and configuration, such as network settings and installed
optional accessories.
[Panel Settings]
Prints a detailed list of all the settings for the machine.
[PCL Fonts List]

Prints a sample of the available Printer Control Language (PCL) fonts.
[PCL Macros List]

Prints the information on the downloaded PCL macro.
[PDF Fonts List]

Prints a sample of the available PDF fonts.
[Job History]
Prints a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the latest 20
jobs.
[Error History]
Prints a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
[Printer Meter]
Prints the reports for the total number of pages printed.
[Demo Page]
Prints a page for testing colors.
[Protocol Monitor]
Prints a detailed list of latest fax protocol information.

[Address Book]
Prints a list of all addresses registered in the address book.
[Server Address]
Prints a list of all server addresses registered in the address book.
[Fax Activity]
Prints the information on faxes you recently received and sent.
[Fax Pending List]

Prints a list of all pending faxes.
[Stored Documents List]

Prints a list of print jobs saved using the Sample Set feature.
Note
• This setting is available only when [RAM Disk] is enabled. For details, see "[RAM Disk] (P.266)."
10.4.1 Printing Information Pages

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Information Pages].

4. Tap next to the name of the desired report or list.
230 User Guide

10.5 [Trays]
You can specify the size and type of paper loaded in Tray 1, Tray 5 (bypass), or Tray 2 (One Tray Module)
(optional).
[Bypass Tray] ...................................................................................................................................................................................231

[Tray 1]...............................................................................................................................................................................................231
[Tray 2]...............................................................................................................................................................................................232
[Tray Priority] ...................................................................................................................................................................................232
Refer
• For details about supported paper sizes and types, see "Usable Print Media on Each Tray (P.63)."
10.5.1 [Bypass Tray]

Specify the size or type of paper loaded in Tray 5 (bypass).
[Use Driver Setting]

Specify whether to use the paper size and type specified on the print driver.
[Paper Size]*
Select the paper size.
When the non-standard size paper is used, tap [Custom Paper Size], and specify the length and width of the
paper in the [Custom Paper Size] screen.
Refer
• For details on usable paper media, see "Usable Print Media on Each Tray (P.63)."
[Paper Type]*
Select the paper type.
[Display Tray Prompt]

Specify whether to display a screen for specifying the paper size and paper type when paper is loaded in Tray 5
(bypass).
*
This setting is available only when [Use Driver Setting] is disabled.
10.5.2 [Tray 1]
Specify the size or type of paper loaded in Tray 1.

[Paper Size]
Displays the paper size.
[Paper Type]

Specify whether to display a screen for specifying the paper size and paper type when paper is loaded in in Tray
1.
10.5.3 [Tray 2]
Note
• Available only when Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional) is installed.
Specify the size and type of paper loaded in Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (optional).
[Auto Detect]
When the standard size paper is used, tap to display the check mark. The machine detects the paper size
automatically.
When the non-standard size paper is used, tap to clear the check mark, and specify the length and width of
the paper in [Custom Paper Size].
[Paper Size]
When the standard size paper is used with the check mark displayed in [Auto Detect], the detected paper size is
displayed.
When the non-standard size paper is specified, the item name changes to [Custom Paper Size], and the specified
paper size is displayed.
Refer
• For details on usable paper media, see "Usable Print Media on Each Tray (P.63)."
[Paper Type]
Specify the type of paper loaded in Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (optional).

Specify whether to display a screen for specifying the paper size and paper type when paper is loaded in Tray 2
(One Tray Module) (optional).
10.5.4 [Tray Priority]

Set the priority order of the paper trays to be used. If paper trays loaded with the same paper size and type
exist, the paper tray is automatically selected according to this priority order.
232 User Guide

10.6 [Supplies]
You can check the status of consumables.

Note
• For non-genuine toner cartridges, the remaining amount of toner is not displayed in percentage. When the toner
cartridge is empty, [Replace] is displayed, and when the toner cartridge is not empty, [OK] is displayed regardless of the
remaining amount of toner.

10.7 [Billing Meters]
You can check the total number of printed pages.
[Meter 1]
Displays the total number of color printouts.
[Meter 2]
Displays the total number of monochrome printouts.
[Meter 3]
Displays the total number of large size color prints.
[Meter 4]
Displays the total number of color and monochrome prints (Meter 1 + Meter 2).
234 User Guide

10.8 [General]
You can configure the general settings for the machine, such as date, time, or sound.
Note
[Date & Time]..................................................................................................................................................................................235

[Display Brightness]......................................................................................................................................................................235
[Sounds].............................................................................................................................................................................................235
[NFC]...................................................................................................................................................................................................236
[Status LED (Blue)] ........................................................................................................................................................................237
[Power Saver] ...................................................................................................................................................................................237
[Timers]..............................................................................................................................................................................................237
[Units].................................................................................................................................................................................................237
[Original Size Detected] ..............................................................................................................................................................237
[Check Document Guide] ...........................................................................................................................................................238
[Default Paper Size] ......................................................................................................................................................................238
[Fax Settings]...................................................................................................................................................................................238
[Email Settings] ..............................................................................................................................................................................242
10.8.1 [Date & Time]

Set the date, time, and time zone.
10.8.2 [Display Brightness]

Specify the screen brightness of the touch panel.
10.8.3 [Sounds]
Select the volume level of the notification sounds.
[Enable Sound]
Specify whether to enable setting the volume. When this setting is enabled, you can set the volume for each
notification sound.
[Select]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the operator panel input is correct.

[Invalid]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the operator panel input is not correct.
[Copy \ Print]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when a copy or print job is complete.
[Fax Print]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when a fax is printed.
[Fax Sent]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when a fax is sent.
[Secure Print Received]

Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the machine saves a stored print job in the
memory.
[Login \ Logout]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the users login and logout if the User
Authentication feature is enabled.
[Error \ Fault]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when a job ends abnormally or a problem occurs.
[Out of Paper]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the machine runs out of paper.
[Near Life End (Consumables)]

Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the toner is low.
[Auto Clear Alert]

Set the volume of the notification sound that is played before the machine automatically returns to the [Home]
screen.
[Device Ready]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the machine is ready to process a job.
[Recovered from Error]

Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when an error is cleared.
[Powering Off]
Set the volume of the notification sound that is played when the machine is turned off.
10.8.4 [NFC]
Specify whether to allow a mobile device such as a tablet or a smartphone to connect to the machine via NFC
communication.
236 User Guide

10.8.5 [Status LED (Blue)]
Specify whether to enable the blue blinking feature of the Status LED on the operator panel.
Refer
• For details about the Status LED, see "Operator Panel (P.19)."
10.8.6 [Power Saver]

Set the amount of time until the machine enters the power saver mode.
Refer
• For details about the power saver mode, see "Power Saver Mode (P.59)."
[Low Power Timer]

Set the amount of time until the machine enters the low power mode.
[Sleep Timer]
Set the amount of time from low power mode until entering sleep mode.
10.8.7 [Timers]
Configure the timer settings.
[Auto Clear]
Select the amount of time until the machine returns to the [Home] screen when the machine is not operated for
a certain period of time.
[Fault Timeout]
Specifies the amount of time the machine waits before clearing an error message and returning to the [Home]
screen. This setting is used for an error not requiring users' operation to clear.
10.8.8 [Units]
Select the default measurement unit of the numeric value displayed on the operator panel.
Note
• The default setting varies depending on other settings, such as [Country/Region] and the size of the document.
10.8.9 [Original Size Detected]

Specify the size of document to be automatically detected when the machine is set to detect the size of
documents.
[Original Size Settings]

Specify the kind of the paper size to be automatically detected.
[A/B Series (8K/16K)]
A/B series (8K/16K) documents are automatically detected.

[Inch Series]
Inch series documents are automatically detected.
[Switch Original Size 1]

[8.5 x 13"]
Sets 8.5 x 13" as the document size that can be detected automatically.
[8.5 x 14"]
Sets 8.5 x 14" as the document size that can be detected automatically.
[Switch Original Size 2]

[B5]
Sets B5 as the document size that can be detected automatically.
[16K]
Sets 16K as the document size that can be detected automatically.
10.8.10 [Check Document Guide]

Specify whether to show a message when you need to check that the document guides of the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF) are aligned properly.
10.8.11 [Default Paper Size]

Selects A4 or letter for paper size to print data whose size is not specified, such as reports.
10.8.12 [Fax Settings]

Specify the settings for the fax function.
[Fax Number]
Enter a fax number for the machine. The fax number is printed on the fax header.
[Country/Region]
Select the country where the machine is used.
[Company Name]
Enter the sender name. The sender name is printed on the fax header. Up to 23 characters can be entered.
[Fax Line Settings]

Configure the basic settings for the fax line.
[Line Type]
Select the line type.
[Line Monitor Tone Volume]
Select the volume level of the line monitor, which can be heard through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.
[DRPD Pattern]
Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
238 User Guide

Pattern1–7 Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD
Patterns are specified by your telephone company. The following shows the patterns provided with
the machine.
Pattern1
Pattern2
Pattern3
Pattern4
Pattern5
Pattern6
Pattern7
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example,
Pattern7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms,
rings for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This machine
only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.
[External Phone Hook Threshold]

Select the detection level of an off-hook signal from the external telephone.
[Off Hook Wake Up]
Specify whether to recover from the power saver mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
[Incoming Fax Settings]

Configure the settings for receiving faxes.
[Receive Mode]
Specify the fax receiving mode.
[TEL Mode]
Receives faxes by operating the external telephone or the touch panel. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by tapping [Receive] on the
touch panel.
[FAX Mode]
Automatically receives faxes.
[TEL/FAX Mode]
When the machine receives an incoming call, the external telephone rings for the time specified in [TEL/FAX
Mode] under [Auto Answer Setup], and then the machine starts receiving the fax. When the machine receives
a phone call, the ringtone is heard from the internal speaker.
[Ans/FAX Mode]
This mode is intended for use with an answering machine. When the machine receives an incoming call, the
machine judges whether it is a fax or a telephone. When the machine detects a fax call, the machine

automatically receives the fax, and when the machine detects a phone call, the machine automatically makes
the answering machine record the phone call. When the answering machine is turned off, the machine
automatically changes the receive mode to [FAX Mode] after the ringtone sounds for a predefined time
length. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not supported.
[DRPD Mode]
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be installed
on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate
number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring
pattern.
[Ring Tone Volume]
Select the volume level of the ringtone. This is effective when [Receive Mode] is set to [TEL/FAX Mode], and the
ringtone is heard from the internal speaker when the machine receives the phone call.
[Auto Answer Setup]
Specify the settings for automatic fax reception.
[FAX Mode]
Set the interval at which the machine goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.
[TEL/FAX Mode]
Set the interval at which the machine goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an
incoming call.
[Ans/FAX Mode]
Set the interval at which the machine goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine
receives an incoming call.
[Junk Fax Filter]
Specify whether to reject faxes from fax numbers not registered in the address book of the machine.
[Forward Settings]
Specify whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
[Off]
Prints incoming faxes.
[Forward]
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination.
[Forwarding Number]
Enter a fax number for the destination to which incoming faxes are forwarded.
[Print and Forward]
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified destination.
[Forwarding Number]
Enter a fax number for the destination to which incoming faxes are forwarded.
[Forward to Email]*1,2,3
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified e-mail address.
[Print and Email]*1,2,3
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified e-mail address.
[Forward to Server]*3,4
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address.
[Print & Fwd to Server]*3,4
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified server address.
*1
Depending on the e-mail server settings, the machine may not display a transfer error. Make sure that the fax is properly forwarded to the
specified forwarding destination as needed.
*2
Requires mail server settings. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
240 User Guide

*3 Requires registering e-mail addresses of the destinations. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
*4
Requires file server settings. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
[Receive Size]
Specify the maximum size of paper for printing received faxes.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specify whether to print the received faxes on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Note
• This feature may not be available depending on the size of the received faxes or settings of the trays, etc.
[Remote Receive]
Specify whether to enable receiving a fax by operating the external telephone connected to the machine. To use
this feature, you need to select [On], and then specify a two-digit code on [Remote Receive Tone]. You can
receive a fax by entering a remote receive code specified on [Remote Receive Tone] on the external telephone.
[Auto Reduction]
Sets the operation when the length of a received fax document exceeds the length of paper to be printed.
[Outgoing Fax Settings]

Configure the settings for sending faxes.
[Auto Redial Setup]
Specify the settings for automatic redial.
[Number of Redials]
Specify the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the machine does not redial.
[Redial Interval]
Specify the interval between redial attempts.
[Interval Timer]
Specify the interval between re-send attempts.
[Dial Type]
Select the dialing type.
[PB]
Uses tone dialing.
[DP (10pps)]
Uses pulse dialing with 10 pulses per second.
[DP (20pps)]
Uses pulse dialing with 20 pulses per second.
[Prefix Dial]
Specify a prefix dial number. This number is dialed preceding any dial number. This is useful in telephone
networks using Private Branch Exchange (PBX).
[Cover Sheet]
Specify whether to attach a cover page to faxes. The cover page is attached to the first page of the outgoing fax
as the cover. The cover page contains the recipient, sender name, fax number of the machine, number of pages,
and date and time of sending.
[Send Header]
Specify whether to add the sender information. On the top of the outgoing fax, sender information is added
containing the date, start time of communication, sender name, recipient name, sender ID, and number of
pages.

[ECM]
Specify whether to enable the ECM feature. To use the ECM feature, the remote machines must also support the
ECM feature. ECM stands for "Error Correction Mode." With ECM, which is one of the G3 communication
methods, the machine checks that the data is properly sent to the recipient, and if not, resends the data.
[Modem Speed]
Select the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
[Display Manual Fax Recipient]
Specify whether to display a fax number for the recipient on the screen of the operator panel when manually
sending a fax.
[Fax Reports]
Configure the settings for fax reports.
[Fax Activity]
Specify whether to automatically print a fax activity report when the total number of fax communications
reaches 50.
[Fax Transmit]
Specify whether to print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
[Print Always]
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
[Print On Error]
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
[Print Disabled]
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
[Fax Broadcast]
Specify whether to print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.
[Print Always]
[Print On Error]
[Print Disabled]
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.
[Protocol Monitor]
Specify whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication
problem.
[Print Always]
[Print On Error]
[Print Disabled]
Does not print the protocol monitor report.
10.8.13 [Email Settings]

Configure the e-mail settings.
[Max Email Size]

Specify the maximum size of an e-mail that can be sent.
242 User Guide

10.9 [Network Settings]
You can configure the network settings.
[Wi-Fi] .................................................................................................................................................................................................243
[Wi-Fi Direct]....................................................................................................................................................................................245
[Ethernet]..........................................................................................................................................................................................246
[Protocol]...........................................................................................................................................................................................247
[Other]................................................................................................................................................................................................247
10.9.1 [Wi-Fi]
Note
• This setting is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected from the machine, and the optional Wireless LAN
Kit is connected to the machine.
Configure the wireless network settings.
[Wi-Fi Setup Wizard]

Configure the wireless settings by selecting an access point or wireless router on the displayed screen, or by
tapping [Enter SSID] or [WPS].
[Enter SSID]
Enter the name to identify the access point or wireless router.
[Infrastructure]
Select the encryption type for an infrastructure network.
[No Encryption]
Specifies the wireless setting without specifying an encryption type.
[Mixed mode PSK]
Selects automatically either WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP) or WPA2-PSK (AES) for the encryption type.
[Enter a Passphrase]
Enter the passphrase.
[WPA2-PSK-AES]
Uses WPA2-PSK (AES) for the encryption type.
[Enter a Passphrase]
Enter the passphrase.
[WEP]
Uses WEP for the encryption type.
[Enter 10 or 26 Hex Characters]
Enter the WEP key.
[Ad hoc]
Specify the encryption type for Ad-hoc mode.

[No Encryption]
Specifies the wireless setting without specifying an encryption type.
[WEP]
Uses WEP for the encryption type.
[Enter 10 or 26 Hex Characters]
Enter the WEP key.
Note
• The [Ad hoc] setting is available only when [Wi-Fi Direct] is disabled.
[WPS]
Specify the wireless network settings using WPS.
[Connect via PIN]
Specifies the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned to the machine.
[IP Mode]
Select the IP mode.
Note
• Wi-Fi Direct cannot be used when [IPv6] is selected.
[Dual Stack]
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to specify the IP address.
[IPv4]
Uses IPv4 to specify the IP address.
[IPv6]
[TCP/IP]
Configure the TCP/IP settings.
[IP Addressing]
[DHCP/AutoIP]
Specifies the IP address automatically.
[BOOTP]
Specifies the IP address using BOOTP.
[RARP]
Specifies the IP address using RARP.
[DHCP]
Specifies the IP address using DHCP.
[Manual Input]
Specify the IP address manually.
[IP Address]
Displays the IP address assigned to the machine. Enter the IP address when [IP Addressing] is set to [Manual
Input].
[Subnet Mask]
Displays the subnet mask assigned to the machine. Enter the subnet mask when [IP Addressing] is set to
[Manual Input].
[Gateway Address]
Displays the gateway address assigned to the machine. Enter the gateway address when [IP Addressing] is set
to [Manual Input].
244 User Guide

[Disable IPsec]
Disables IPsec communication.
Note
• This setting is available only when [IPsec] is enabled on CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see the CentreWare
Internet Services Help.
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

Initializes wireless network settings. After performing this setting and restarting the machine, all the wireless
network settings are reset to their factory settings.
10.9.2 [Wi-Fi Direct]

Note
• This setting is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected from the machine, and the optional Wireless LAN
Kit is connected to the machine.
• Wi-Fi Direct cannot be used in an IPv6 or Ad-hoc environment.
Configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
[Wi-Fi Direct]
Specify whether to enable or disable the Wi-Fi Direct network.
[Group Role]
[Auto]
Automatically specifies the group role of the machine.
[Group Owner]
Sets the machine as the group owner of the Wi-Fi Direct network. When the machine is set to the group owner,
the machine functions as the access point or wireless router, and mobile devices can discover the machine.
[Device Name]
Enter the machine name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
When you select the machine name on your mobile device, find the name specified here.
[Paired Device]
Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connections.
[Disconnect All] > [Disconnect Now]
Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections.
[Disconnect All] > [Disconnect and Reset Passphrase]
Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connections and changes the passphrase.
[SSID]
Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network. After "DIRECT-XX," enter up to 23 alphanumeric
characters. When you select the Wi-Fi Direct network name on your mobile device, find the name specified here.
[Passphrase]
Displays the passphrase. Enter the passphrase displayed here when you connect to the Wi-Fi Direct network
from your mobile device.

[Reset Passphrase]
Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connections and changes the passphrase.
[Print Passphrase]
Prints the passphrase.
[WPS Setup]
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS.
[Push Button Configuration]
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS (push button method).
[PIN Code]
Specify the Wi-Fi Direct network using the PIN code assigned to the machine.
[Reset PIN Code]
Change the PIN code.
[Print PIN Code]
Prints the PIN code.
10.9.3 [Ethernet]
Note
• This setting item is available only when the machine is connected to a wired network.
Configure the wired network settings.
[IP Mode]
Select the IP mode.
[Dual Stack]
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to specify the IP address.
[IPv4]
[IPv6]
[TCP/IP]
Configure the TCP/IP settings.
[IP Addressing]
[DHCP/AutoIP]
Specifies the IP address automatically.
[BOOTP]
Specifies the IP address using BOOTP.
[RARP]
Specifies the IP address using RARP.
[DHCP]
Specifies the IP address using DHCP.
[Manual Input]
Specify the IP address manually.
246 User Guide

[IP Address]
Displays the IP address assigned to the machine. Enter the IP address when [IP Addressing] is set to [Manual
Input].
[Subnet Mask]
Displays the subnet mask assigned to the machine. Enter the subnet mask when [IP Addressing] is set to
[Manual Input].
[Gateway Address]
Displays the gateway address assigned to the machine. Enter the gateway address when [IP Addressing] is set
to [Manual Input].
[Modem Speed]
Select the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet.
• [Auto]
• [10BASE-T Half]
• [10BASE-T Full]
• [100BASE-TX Half]
• [100BASE-TX Full]
• [1000BASE-TX Full]
[Disable IPsec]
Disables IPsec communication.
Note
• This setting is available only when [IPsec] is enabled on CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see the CentreWare
10.9.4 [Protocol]
Specify whether to enable or disable each protocol.
• [LPD]
• [Port 9100]
• [FTP]
• [IPP]
• [WSD Print]*1
• [WSD Scan]*1
• [SNMP UDP]*2
• [StatusMessenger]
• [Internet Services]
• [Bonjour (mDNS)]
• [Telnet]
• [Update Address Book]
• [HTTP - SSL/TLS]
• [Google Cloud Print]
*1
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
*2 SNMP stands for Simple Network Management Protocol.
10.9.5 [Other]
Configure the advanced network settings.

[IPv4 Filter]
Specifies whether to limit devices that can communicate with the machine. Register the range of IPv4 addresses
that you want to allow to communicate with the machine on CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
• This feature does not apply to communication via Wi-Fi Direct.
[IPv6 Filter]
Specifies whether to limit devices that can communicate with the machine. Register the range of IPv6 addresses
that you want to allow to communicate with the machine on CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
• This feature does not apply to communication via Wi-Fi Direct.
[Disable IEEE 802.1x]

Disables IEEE 802.1x authentication.
Note
• This setting is available only when the machine is connected using an Ethernet cable and the IEEE 802.1x
authentication is enabled on CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
[Reset Network Settings]

Initializes wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After performing this setting and restarting
the machine, all the wired network settings are reset to their factory settings.
[Delete All Certificates]

Deletes all certificates of the machine.
248 User Guide

10.10 [App Defaults]
You can configure the default settings for the copy, fax, and scan functions, and the USB Direct Print feature.
Note
[Copy Settings] ...............................................................................................................................................................................249

[Fax Settings]...................................................................................................................................................................................251
[Scan Settings]................................................................................................................................................................................251
[Direct Print Settings]...................................................................................................................................................................253
10.10.1 [Copy Settings]

Configure the default settings for the copy function.
[Output Color]
Select the default color mode.
When [Auto] is selected, the machine detects color documents and black and white documents to automatically
determine whether to copy the document in color or black and white.
[Paper Trays]
Specify the paper tray to be selected as the default setting.
When [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects the paper tray with the optimal size of paper loaded
according to the document size and the zoom ratio.
[Collation]
Specify whether to print out the copy page by page or set by set as the default setting.
[Auto]
Prints out the copies set by set when the document is set to the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
Prints out the copies page by page when the document is set to the document glass.
[Collated]
Prints out the copies set by set.
[Uncollated]
Prints out the copies page by page.
[Reduce/Enlarge]
Specify the default copy zoom ratio.
When [Auto %] is selected, the machine automatically specifies the optimal zoom ratio according to the
document size and the paper size.

[Original Size]
Select the default document size to be copied.
When [Auto] is selected, the machine detects and specifies the document size automatically.
[Original Type]
Select the default document type.
[Lighten/Darken]
Specify the default copy density.
[Sharpness]
Specify the default sharpness level of the image.
When [Sharpen] is selected, the image is sharper, and when [Soften] is selected, the image is softer.
[Saturation]
Specify the default vividness level of color.
Specify whether to suppress the background density of the document to enhance the copied image as the
default setting.
Tap to display the check mark to suppress the background density of the document.
[Color Balance]
Specify the default color balances of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, each for low, medium, and high density.
[2-Sided]
Specify whether to copy on both sides of a sheet of paper as the default setting.
[1→1 Sided]
Copies one-sided documents into one-sided printouts.
[1→2 Sided]
Copies one-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Specify whether the printouts are bound at the long edge
or the short edge.
[2→1 Sided]
Copies two-sided documents into one-sided printouts. Specify whether the document is bound at the long edge
or the short edge.
[2→2 Sided]
Copies two-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Specify whether the printouts are bound at the long edge
or the short edge.
[2-Up]
Specify whether to copy two pages of a document to fit onto one side of a sheet of paper as the default setting.
[Off]
[Auto]
Copies two pages of a document onto one side of a sheet of paper. The zoom ratio is specified automatically.
[Edge Erase]
Specify the default margins to remove the shadows when copying a thick document or a booklet.
250 User Guide

[Top & Bottom]
Specify the top and bottom margins.
[Left & Right]
Specify the right and left margins.
[Middle]
Specify the center margin.
[Number Of Cards]
Select the number of cards to be copied at a time when making an ID card copy as the default setting.
10.10.2 [Fax Settings]

Configure the default settings for the fax function.
[Preview]
Specify whether to display the preview of the scanned data before sending a fax as the default setting.
Tap to display the check mark to display the preview.
[Resolution]
Select the default image quality when scanning a document.
[2-Sided Scanning]
Specify whether to scan both sides of documents as the default setting. For two-sided documents, specify
whether the document is bound at the long edge or the short edge.
[Lighten/Darken]
Specify the default density of outgoing faxes.
[Original Size]
Select the default document size to be sent.
[Delay Send]
Specify the default time to start sending when specifying [Delay Send].
10.10.3 [Scan Settings]

Configure the default settings for the scan function.
[File Format]
Select the default file format of the scanned data to be saved.
[Preview]
Specify whether to display the preview of the scanned data before storing or sending as the default setting.
Tap to display the check mark to display the preview.
[Output Color]
Select the default color mode when scanning a document.

[Resolution]
Select the default scan resolution rate when scanning a document.
[Original Size]
Select the default document size to be scanned.
[2-Sided Scanning]
Specify whether to scan both sides of documents as the default setting. For two-sided documents, specify
whether the document is bound at the long edge or the short edge.
[Lighten/Darken]
Specify the default scan density.
[Sharpness]
Specify the default sharpness level of the image.
When [Sharpen] is selected, the image is sharper, and when [Soften] is selected, the image is softer.
[Contrast]
Specify the default difference between the light and the dark.
When [More] is selected, the difference between the light and the dark is bigger, and when [Less] is selected, the
difference is smaller.
Specify whether to suppress the background density of the document to enhance the scanned image as the
default setting.
Tap to display the check mark to suppress the background density of the document.
[Edge Erase]
Specify the default margins to remove the shadows when scanning a thick document or a booklet.
[Top & Bottom]
Specify the top and bottom margins.
[Left & Right]
Specify the right and left margins.
[Middle]
Specify the center margin.
[File Name]
Specify how to name the scanned data as the default setting.
252 User Guide

Note
second.
• When the scanned data is stored as one page per file, when the file name is the same with that of the existing file on the
server, or when using the Scan to Email feature, "-" (hyphen) and consecutive four-digit number (0001 - 9999) are added
after the file name.
\/:*?"<>|
[Add Folder]
Specify whether to create a new folder to which the scanned data is stored as the default setting.
10.10.4 [Direct Print Settings]

Configure the default settings for the USB Direct Print feature.
[Output Color]
Specify whether to print in color or black and white as the default setting.
[Paper Trays]
Specify the paper tray to be selected as the default setting.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper as the default setting. For two-sided printing, specify
whether the printouts are bound at the long edge or short edge.
[Layout]
Specify the default number of pages to be imposed on one side of print media.
[Image Type]
Select the default print image quality.
[Auto]
Prints PDF/TIFF files in the [Text] mode and JPEG files in the [Photos (Standard Quality)] mode.
[Photos (Standard Quality)]
Prints the photographic images in standard quality.
[Photos (High Quality)]
Prints the photographic images in high quality.
[Text]
Prints the text document in standard quality.
[Collation]
Specify whether to print out the file page by page or set by set as the default setting.
[Collated]
Prints out the file set by set.

[Uncollated]
Prints out the file page by page.
[PDF Password]
Set the default password used to print PDF files protected by a password.
254 User Guide

10.11 [Security Settings]
You can configure the security settings, such as limiting access to the setting menus or functions.
Note
[Panel Lock] ......................................................................................................................................................................................255

[Service Lock]...................................................................................................................................................................................256
[User Authentication] ..................................................................................................................................................................257
[Secure Fax Receive] .....................................................................................................................................................................257
[Copy Accounting].........................................................................................................................................................................258
[Print Accounting]..........................................................................................................................................................................258
[Edit Email From Field] ................................................................................................................................................................259
[Confirm Recipients] .....................................................................................................................................................................259
[Domain Filtering] .........................................................................................................................................................................259
[Software Download]...................................................................................................................................................................259
[Login Attempts] ............................................................................................................................................................................259
[Security Warning].........................................................................................................................................................................259
10.11.1 [Panel Lock]

Specify whether to limit access to the settings with a passcode, and to change the passcode.
[Panel Lock Settings]

Specify whether to limit access to the menus with a passcode. Set passcode protection for the following setting
menus:
• [Address Book]
• [Information Pages]
• [General]
• [Network Settings]
• [App Defaults]
• [Security Settings]
• [Maintenance]
• [Advanced Settings]
[Change Passcode]
Change the passcode to be used.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled.

10.11.2 [Service Lock]
Note
• This setting is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled. For details about this setting, see "[Panel Lock]
(P.255)."
Specify whether to enable or disable each of the machine functions, or to use a passcode to restrict the use of a
function. For [Copy] and [USB Direct Print], you can restrict the color copying and color printing features with a
passcode.
[Customize Home and App]

Specify whether to enable the feature to rearrange the tiles or add new tiles on the [Home] screen.
[Copy]
Specify whether to enable the copy function. Selecting [Color Disabled] disables copying in color.
[Scan to Email]
Specify whether to enable the Scan to Email feature.
[Fax]
Specify whether to enable the fax function.
[Scan to Network]
Specify whether to enable the Scan to Network feature.
[Scan to WSD]
Specify whether to enable the Scan to WSD feature.
[Scan to USB Drive]

Specify whether to enable the Scan to USB feature.
[USB Direct Print]

Specify whether to enable the USB Direct Print feature. Selecting [Color Disabled] disables printing in color.
[Menu when USB is inserted]

Specify whether to show the [USB] screen when a USB flash drive is inserted into the machine.
[PC Scan]
Specify whether to enable the feature of scanning from a computer. If you select [Lock with Passcode], entering
a passcode is required when scanning from a computer.
[Direct Fax]
Specify whether to enable the Direct Fax feature. If you select [Lock with Passcode], entering a passcode is
required when using the Direct Fax feature.
[Change Passcode]
Change the passcode for [PC Scan] and [Direct Fax].
Note
• This setting is displayed only when [Lock with Passcode] is enabled on [PC Scan] or [Direct Fax].
256 User Guide

10.11.3 [User Authentication]
Note
• This setting is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled, and [Copy Accounting] is disabled. For details about
the settings, see "[Panel Lock] (P.255)" and "[Copy Accounting] (P.258)."
Specifies whether to restrict access to the features of the machine on each user.
[Disable]
Disables the User Authentication feature.
[Local Authentication]
Restricts access to the features of the machine on each user.
Restrictions can be applied on the following features:
• Customizing the [Home] screen and widget tiles
• Copying
• Scanning ([Scan to Email]/[Scan to Network]/[Scan to WSD]/[Scan to USB Drive])
• Faxing*(only on the model with the fax function)
• USB Direct Print
*
The Direct Fax feature is not restricted. If the fax receive mode is set to [TEL Mode], receiving faxes is also restricted.
Note
• The features that are restricted by [Service Lock] cannot be used even if they are permitted by the User Authentication
feature. For details about the [Service Lock] setting, see "[Service Lock] (P.256)."
Refer
• For details about how to register users to the machine and set the usage restrictions for each features on users, see
"Using the User Authentication Feature (P.324)."
10.11.4 [Secure Fax Receive]

Note
(P.255)."
• Even when this setting is enabled, if [Forward Settings] is set to [Forward to Email], [Print and Email], [Forward to Server],
or [Print & Fwd to Server], the received faxes are stored in the memory of the machine, and forwarded to the specified
destinations. The passcode is required when the received faxes are printed on this machine or forwarded to the specified
fax number. The passcode is not required when the faxes are forwarded to the specified address or server. For details
about [Forward Settings], see "[Forward Settings] (P.240)."
Specify whether to require a passcode to print received faxes, and to change the passcode.
[Secure Fax Receive]

Specify whether to require a passcode to print received faxes.
[Change Passcode]
Change the passcode to be used.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Secure Fax Receive] is enabled.

10.11.5 [Copy Accounting]
Configure the copying restriction settings.
When the Copy Accounting feature is enabled, the machine authenticates users so that only users registered in
the machine (registered users) can copy. This feature can also restrict each user's copying and count up copied
pages.
Note
• For details about how to register users to the machine and set copying restrictions on users, see "Permitting Only
Registered Users to Copy (P.311)," or "Setting Copying Restrictions on Each Registered User (P.313)."
10.11.6 [Print Accounting]

Configure the print restriction settings.
[Print Accounting]
Restricts printing and counts up printed pages for each user.
Note
• For details about how to register users to the machine and set printing restrictions, see "Permitting Only Registered Users
to Print (P.291)," or "Setting Printing Restrictions on Each Registered User (P.295)."
[Unauthenticated User Print]

When [Print Accounting] is enabled, jobs without account information (user name and password) cannot be
printed. To permit printing these jobs, enable this feature.
The jobs without account information are the following:
• Jobs generated using other company's print drivers or utilities
• Jobs submitted using the following features:
– Printing using the Cloud Service Hub
– USB Direct Print
– AirPrint
– Google Cloud Print
– Mopria Print Service
Note
• Even if a print driver or an application provided by Fuji Xerox is used, jobs generated with the print driver's or
application's user authentication settings disabled are regarded as jobs without account information.
[Auto Color To Mono Print]

• When [Print Accounting] is enabled
Forcibly prints color jobs in black and white for the user whose color printing is restricted. Also forcibly
prints color jobs without account information in black and white when [Unauthenticated User Print] is
enabled.
Note
• A user with restrictions on performing color printing is a user who is prohibited from performing color printing on
[Accounting] of the CentreWare Internet Services. When [Auto Color To Mono Print] is disabled, color jobs are canceled
for the user whose color printing is restricted. For details, see "Permitting Printing Only in Black and White (P.296)."
• When [Print Accounting] is disabled
Forcibly prints color jobs in black and white for all users.
258 User Guide

10.11.7 [Edit Email From Field]
Specify whether to enable editing the e-mail address for the sender when you send scanned data using the Scan
to Email feature.
Refer
• For details about the e-mail address for the sender, see "[From] (P.143)."
10.11.8 [Confirm Recipients]

Specify whether to display the recipient confirmation screen before sending an e-mail and a fax (only on the
model with the fax function).
Note
• If this setting is set to [On], destinations can only be selected from the address book. You cannot directly enter an e-mail
address or fax number.
10.11.9 [Domain Filtering]

Specify whether to restrict sending e-mails to specified domains.
Note
• Specify the domains from [Domain Filtering] on CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see the CentreWare Internet
Services Help.
10.11.10 [Software Download]

Specify whether to enable download of firmware updates.
10.11.11 [Login Attempts]

Note
(P.255)."
Specify the number of error entry attempts. This setting is effective when you login the following setting menus:
[Panel Lock], [Service Lock], and [Secure Fax Receive].
10.11.12 [Security Warning]

Specify whether to display a security warning when a user uses CentreWare Internet Services as the
administrator on the machine to which a global IP address is allocated.

10.12 [Maintenance]
You can configure the maintenance settings, such as adjusting the transfer unit and initializing the non-volatile
(NV) memory.
Note
[Adjust Paper Type].......................................................................................................................................................................260

[Adjust Transfer Belt Unit]..........................................................................................................................................................260
[Adjust 2nd BTR] ............................................................................................................................................................................260
[Image Position].............................................................................................................................................................................260
[Adjust Color Registration].........................................................................................................................................................261
[Quick Density Adjust] .................................................................................................................................................................261
[Calibration] .....................................................................................................................................................................................261
[Initialize NVM] ..............................................................................................................................................................................261
[Initialize Print Meter]..................................................................................................................................................................262
[Clear Stored Jobs] ........................................................................................................................................................................262
[Non-Genuine Toner]....................................................................................................................................................................262
[Adjust Altitude].............................................................................................................................................................................262
[Delete Job History] ......................................................................................................................................................................262
10.12.1 [Adjust Paper Type]

10.12.2 [Adjust Transfer Belt Unit]

Change the transfer bias when repeated images (ghosting) appear on the output.
10.12.3 [Adjust 2nd BTR]

Specify the transfer roller voltage for each paper type. If you see mottles on the print output, increase the
voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, decrease the voltage.
10.12.4 [Image Position]

Adjusts the alignment of the printed image.
260 User Guide

[Lead/Side Registration]
Adjusts the position of the printed image in the direction of the paper length (Lead Regi (L)) and paper width
(Side Regi (S)) for each paper tray.
[Perpendicularity]
Adjusts the perpendicularity of the image.
10.12.5 [Adjust Color Registration]

Adjusts the color registration. Use this menu when the machine is installed or after the machine is moved.
10.12.6 [Quick Density Adjust]

Corrects the toner density automatically. Perform the correction if the toner density seems improper, or when
you need a more precise print result.
10.12.7 [Calibration]
Performs the automatic calibration. When the density or reproductivity of color deteriorates when copying or
printing, specify the target function and perform the calibration for that function.
10.12.8 [Initialize NVM]

Initializes the non-volatile (NV) memory. After performing this setting and restarting the machine, all the menu
parameters are reset to their factory settings.
[Fax Settings]
Deletes the following data registered in the machine: fax number, sender name, and fax number/e-mail
addresses/server address to which incoming faxes are forwarded.
[Scan Settings]
Deletes the server addresses registered in the machine.
[User Account Settings]

Resets the [Home] screen and widget tiles to the factory default state.
[User App Settings]

Deletes the added widget applications.
[System Settings]
Resets the system settings to the factory default state.
[Address Book]
Deletes the destinations in the address book.
Note
• To delete the server addresses, select [Scan Settings].

10.12.9 [Initialize Print Meter]
Initializes the accounting meters.
10.12.10 [Clear Stored Jobs]

Note
• This setting is available only when [RAM Disk] is enabled. For details, see "[RAM Disk] (P.266)."
Clears print jobs saved using the stored print feature.
[All Documents]
Deletes all print jobs saved using the stored print feature.
[Secure Print]
Deletes print jobs saved using the Secure Print feature.
[Sample Set]
Deletes print jobs saved using the Sample Set feature.
10.12.11 [Non-Genuine Toner]

Specify whether to use toner cartridges of another manufacturer.
Important
• When non-genuine toner cartridges are used, you may not be able to get the optimum performance of the machine.
The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-genuine toner cartridges.
10.12.12 [Adjust Altitude]

Select the altitude of the location where the machine is installed.
When the altitude is correctly selected, optimum printing quality is attained, and the remaining amount of toner
is correctly displayed.
10.12.13 [Delete Job History]

Clears the job history of all finished jobs.
262 User Guide

10.13 [Advanced Settings]
You can customize the settings in accordance with the setting environment, or your preferences.
[PCL Settings] ..................................................................................................................................................................................263

[PDF Settings] .................................................................................................................................................................................265
[USB Port Settings]........................................................................................................................................................................266
[Copy Settings] ...............................................................................................................................................................................266
[Scan Settings]................................................................................................................................................................................266
[Output Settings] ...........................................................................................................................................................................266
[Low Toner Alert Message].........................................................................................................................................................268
[End of Drum Life] .........................................................................................................................................................................268
[Job History].....................................................................................................................................................................................268
[LDAP Address Book] ....................................................................................................................................................................268
[Optional Apps]...............................................................................................................................................................................269
10.13.1 [PCL Settings]

Configure the machine settings related to the Printer Control Language (PCL).
[Paper Trays]
Select the default paper tray.
[Output Size]
Specify the paper size.
[Original Orientation]
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.
[2-Sided]
[Font]
Select the default font from the fonts registered in the machine.
[Symbol Set]
Select a symbol set for a specified font.

[Font Size]
Specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
[Font Pitch]
Specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts. Font pitch refers to the number of characters printed in
one horizontal inch.
[Form Line]
Specify the number of lines in a page. The amount of space between lines are specified based on the [Output
Size] and [Original Orientation] settings. Specify the paper size and the orientation beforehand.
[Quantity]
Specify the number of copies to print.
Note
• For a specific job, set the quantity from the print driver. Values selected from the print driver always override values
selected from the operator panel.
[Image Enhance]
Specify whether to enable the image enhance feature. Enabling this feature makes the boundary line between
black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.
[Hex Dump]
Specify whether to help to isolate the source of a print job problem. With this setting enabled, all data sent to
the machine is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
[Draft Mode]
Specify whether to save toner when printing. The print quality is lower when compared to normal printing.
[Line Termination]
Specify whether to add line termination commands.
[Off]
The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
[Add LF]
The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
[Add CR]
The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
[CR-XX]
The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
[Output Color]
Select the color mode.
[Ignore Form Feed]

Specify whether not to print the blank pages without any images, and to print only the pages with images.
264 User Guide

10.13.2 [PDF Settings]
Configure the machine settings that only affect PDF files.
[Quantity]
Specify the number of copies to print.
[2-Sided]
[Print Mode]
Select the print mode.
[Normal]
Use this mode for documents with normal sized characters.
[Fine]
Use this mode for documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using a dot-matrix
printer.
[High Speed]
Prints with higher speed than the [Normal] mode, but with lower quality.
[PDF Password]
Set the password used to print PDF files protected by a password.
[Collation]
Specify whether to print out the file page by page or set by set when printing multiple number of copies of PDF
files.
[Output Size]
Specify the paper size.
[Layout]
Select the output layout.
[1-Up]
Prints a document in the layout specified by the machine.
[Off (No Scaling)]
Prints in the same size as a document.
[Booklet Creation]
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper bound by the edge.
[2-Up]
Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
[4-Up]
Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
[PDF Default Color]

Select the color mode.

[Detect Job Separator]
Specify whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively.
10.13.3 [USB Port Settings]

Configure the machine settings related to a USB port.
[Port Status]
Specify whether to enable the USB port of the machine.
[Fixed Port]
Specify whether to use the same port as the one specified when the software has been installed.
[Job Timeout]
Set the amount of time the machine waits until the machine receives data from the computer. The print job is
canceled when the job is not printed within the specified time frame.
10.13.4 [Copy Settings]

Configure the advanced copy settings.
[BackgroundSuppressionLevel]
Select the background suppression level to adjust the background density of the original.
[Output Color Recognition]

Specify the threshold level for the machine to determine whether a document is color or black and white.
10.13.5 [Scan Settings]

Configure the advanced scan settings.
[BackgroundSuppressionLevel]
Select the background suppression level to adjust the background density of the original.
[TIFF Format]
Select the TIFF file format.
[Quality/File Size]
Select the image compression level.
10.13.6 [Output Settings]

Configure the settings concerning output from the machine.
[RAM Disk]
When using the stored print feature, enable this menu and specify the RAM disk size to store the data.
266 User Guide

[Print ID]
Specify whether to print the user ID, and select the location where the ID is printed.
[Print Text]
Specify whether to print Page Description Language (PDL) data as text when the data is not supported by the
machine.
[Substitute Tray]
Specify whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not
match the paper size settings for the current job.
[Off]
No tray size substitute accepted.
[Larger Size]
Substitutes paper of next largest size. When no larger paper size is available, the machine substitutes paper of
nearest size.
[Nearest Size]
Substitutes paper of nearest size.
[Use Tray 5 (Bypass)]
Uses the paper loaded in Tray 5 (bypass). Load the paper specified by the job in Tray 5 (bypass).
Note
• If the size of the paper loaded in Tray 5 (bypass) does not match the paper size specified by the job, the machine cannot
print the job.
[A4/Letter Switch]
Specify whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available, or to print Letter size
jobs on A4 size paper if Letter size paper is not available.
[Banner Sheet]
Select the position to insert the banner sheet and the tray to load the sheet.
[Insert Position]
[Off]
Does not insert the banner sheet.
[Front]
Inserts the banner sheet before the first page of every copy.
[Back]
Inserts the banner sheet after the last page of every copy.
[Front & Back]
Inserts the banner sheet before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every copy.
[Paper Trays]
[Bypass]
Feeds the banner sheet from Tray 5 (bypass).
[Tray 1]
Feeds the banner sheet from Tray 1.
[Tray 2]*
Feeds the banner sheet from Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (optional).

[Report 2-Sided Print]
Specify whether to print reports on both sides of a sheet of paper.
[Letterhead 2-Sided Print]

Specify whether to print on both sides of letterhead.
10.13.7 [Low Toner Alert Message]

Specify whether to show the alert message when toner is low.
10.13.8 [End of Drum Life]

Specify whether to stop printing when a drum cartridge reaches the end of its life.
Note
• Make sure that this menu should be specified before the message is displayed to notify you to replace the drum
cartridge. This setting cannot be changed after the message of the drum cartridge replacement is displayed.
[Cancel Printing]
Stops printing when a drum cartridge reaches the end of its life.
[Continue Printing]
Does not stop printing even when a drum cartridge reaches the end of its life.
Note
• If a message "Order Drum Cartridge [R1]"* is displayed on [Notifications] when you tap on the [Home] screen, it is
recommended that the drum cartridge should be replaced with a new one, as the printing quality is not guaranteed if
you continue to use after the message is displayed.
• "Replace the Drum Cartridge [R1] now."* indicates that the machine cannot start printing until the drum cartridge is
replaced with a new one.
* The messages for the drum cartridge [R1] are used as examples.
• For details about replacing drum cartridges, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
10.13.9 [Job History]

Specify whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Note
• This report can also be printed using the [Information Pages] menu.
10.13.10 [LDAP Address Book]

Specify whether to enable searching an LDAP server for e-mail addresses and fax numbers (only on the model
with the fax function) from the machine.
Note
• You need to configure settings on CentreWare Internet Services to access an LDAP server from the machine. For details,
see "Using the Address Book in an LDAP Server (P.284)."
[Off]
Disables searching for e-mail addresses.
You cannot search for either fax numbers or e-mail addresses on the model with the fax function.
268 User Guide

[On]
Enables searching for e-mail addresses.
You can search for both fax numbers and e-mail addresses on the model with the fax function.
[On (Fax Only)]*

Enables searching for only fax numbers.
[On (Email Only)]*

Enables searching for only e-mail addresses.
* This setting is displayed on the model with the fax function.
10.13.11 [Optional Apps]

When an optional application is added, specify whether to enable it.

11 Making Better Use of Your
Machine
11.1 Using CentreWare Internet Services.............................................................. 271

11.2 Using Software Supplied With the Machine .............................................. 274
11.3 Using the Address Book ...................................................................................... 279
11.4 Using Print Accounting........................................................................................ 290
11.5 Using Copy Accounting....................................................................................... 310
11.6 Using the User Authentication Feature........................................................ 324
11.7 Using the Encryption Feature........................................................................... 334
270 User Guide

11.1 Using CentreWare Internet Services
Use CentreWare Internet Services to monitor the status of your machine or to change the settings of the
machine from a web browser.
This feature is available on computers connected to the machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
CentreWare Internet Services supports the following features.
Menu name Features

Home You can check the status of the paper tray, output tray, and consumables, support information,
and notifications.
Apps*1 You can configure the fax and e-mail settings.
Address Book*1 You can add, edit or delete destinations.
Jobs You can check the job list or job history.
Connectivity*1 You can configure the settings necessary for network communication.
Permissions*1, *2 You can restrict the features available on the machine for each user.
Accounting*1, *3 You can count how much each user copied and printed, or set copying and printing restrictions
on each user.
System*1 You can configure the settings for security and administrator.
*1
The menu is displayed when you login as the administrator with the Administrator Mode enabled on the CentreWare Internet Services.
For details about how to login as the administrator, see "Logging In As the Administrator (P.273)."
*2 Displayed only when User Authentication is enabled
*3
Displayed only when the Print Accounting or Copy Accounting feature is enabled.
Note
• Some settings become available when you restart the machine from CentreWare Internet Services, or manually turn the
machine off, and then turn it on again.
Refer
• For details about settings available in CentreWare Internet Services, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
11 Making Better Use of Your Machine 271

11.1.1 Setting Up Your Web Browser
The following settings are needed on your web browser before using CentreWare Internet Services.
The following procedure uses Internet Explorer 11 as an example.
Specifying Temporary Internet Files

1. Click [Tools] > [Internet Options].
The [Internet Options] dialog box is displayed.
2. Click [Settings] of [Browsing history] in the [General] tab.
The [Website Data Settings] dialog box is displayed.
3. In the [Temporary Internet Files] tab, select [Every time I visit the webpage] or [Every time I start
Internet Explorer] under [Check for newer versions of stored pages].
4. Click [OK].
The [Website Data Settings] dialog box is closed.
5. Click [OK].
The [Internet Options] dialog box is closed.
Specifying the Proxy Server So That the IP Address of the Machine

Is Treated as Exception
2. Click [LAN settings] of [Local Area Network (LAN) settings] in the [Connections] tab.
The [Local Area Network (LAN) Settings] dialog box is displayed.
3. Set [Proxy server] to either of the following:
• Clear the [Use a proxy server for your LAN] check box.
• Click [Advanced], enter the IP address of the machine in [Exceptions], and then click [OK].
4. Click [OK].
The [Local Area Network (LAN) Settings] dialog box is closed.
5. Click [OK].
Enabling JavaScript
2. Click the [Security] tab, and then click [Local intranet] > [Custom level].
The [Security Settings - Local Intranet Zone] dialog box is displayed.
3. Scroll down to [Scripting], and check that [Active scripting] is enabled.
4. Click [OK].
The [Security Settings - Local Intranet Zone] dialog box is closed.
5. Click [Ok].
272 User Guide

11.1.2 Starting CentreWare Internet Services
To start CentreWare Internet Services, enter the IP address of the machine in your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the machine, verify the IP address by using the operator panel, or printing
the System Settings report. For details about how to verify the IP address, see "Checking the IP Address (P.32)."
11.1.3 Security of CentreWare Internet Services

When using CentreWare Internet Services, you may need to display the menus for the administrator, or the
"certificate" may be required.
Logging In As the Administrator

When the [Administrator Mode] is enabled, the settings of the machine can be changed only when you login as
the administrator.
Note
• If you disable the [Administrator Mode], the settings of the machine can be changed by all users.
 Logging In
Note
[About].
3. Enter the user name and password.
4. Click [Log In].
Note
• The default administrator name and password are as follows:
User name: 11111
Password: x-admin
• It is recommended that you change the administrator name and password immediately after installation.
 Logging Out
1. Click [Administrator] on the upper right corner.
2. Click [Log Out].
Encrypting the Transmission

When the certificate is generated in [Security] in [System] and [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication] is enabled, the
data transmission between the machine and the web browser is encrypted. Also, when using CentreWare
Internet Services, the certificate may be required.

11.2 Using Software Supplied With the
Machine
11.2.1 Overview
Use the "Software/Product Manual" disc to install the following software.
Print & Scan Hub (Windows®)

Print & Scan Hub is software to enable the following features:
• "Checking the Status of the Machine/Jobs/Consumables (P.274)"
• "Notification of Printing Completion/Error (P.275)"
• "Scanning and Easy Editing of the Scanned Image (P.276)"
• "Connecting With a Cloud Storage Service (P.277)"
 Checking the Status of the Machine/Jobs/Consumables

Note
• This feature is available only when the machine is connected to a network.
You can check whether an error has occurred on the machine, or check the job status. Also, by starting
CentreWare Internet Services from the Print & Scan Hub, you can check the status of the toner cartridges/drum
cartridges/waste toner container or the amount of paper remaining in the paper trays.
274 User Guide

2. Select the machine from [Device List], and then click [Device Management].
3. Check the status of the machine and jobs.
4. To check the status of consumables, click [Device Status].

CentreWare Internet Services starts, and you can check the status of consumables.
192.0.2.1
 Notification of Printing Completion/Error

Note
• This feature is available only when the machine is connected to a network.

When printing is completed or when an error occurs, a notification is displayed on the task bar of the computer
screen.
To use this feature, perform the following procedure to enable auto refresh.
2. Click on the upper right corner.
3. Select the [Auto Refresh] check box.
4. Specify [Refresh Interval] as needed, and then click [OK].

 Scanning and Easy Editing of the Scanned Image
You can scan a document by using the Print & Scan Hub and rotate/trim the scanned image. You can save the
scanned image in JPEG/PNG/PDF file format.
Refer
• For details about how to scan using the Print & Scan Hub, see "Scanning Using Print & Scan Hub (P.152)."
276 User Guide

 Connecting With a Cloud Storage Service
You can login to the Cloud Service Hub from the Print & Scan Hub and save the scanned data in the cloud
storage service. You can also open and print files stored in a cloud storage service with a corresponding
application.
Refer
• For details about how to login to the Cloud Service Hub, see "Displaying the Cloud Service Hub Screen (P.199)."
Address Book Editor (Windows® and Mac)

Address Book Editor is a software that mainly provides the following features:
• Acquiring/registering/editing/deleting destinations (fax numbers/e-mail addresses/server addresses)
stored in the machine
• Editing the address book for Direct Fax registered on your computer
• Importing CSV files exported from this product or from certain other products using the Address Book
Editor
• Exporting destination data registered in the machine
• Editing the subject and body text of the e-mail when sending documents scanned by the machine via
e-mail
To start Address Book Editor on Windows®, click [Start] > [All Programs] > [Fuji Xerox DocuCentre SC2022] >
[Address Book Editor].
To start Address Book Editor on a Mac, click [Finder] > [Applications] > [Fuji Xerox] > [Utilities] > [Address Book
Editor].
 Registering Destinations From the Address Book Editor

1. For fax numbers/e-mail addresses, click [New (Machine Address Book)] > [Contact].
For server addresses, click [New (Machine Address Book)] > [Server].
2. Enter each item, and then click [OK].

The destination is registered in the Address Book Editor.

3. Click [Save All].
The registered destination is saved in the machine.

Refer
• For details about how to use the Address Book Editor, see the Address Book Editor help.
ContentsBridge Utility (Windows®)

This software allows you to directly send the files saved on a computer to the machine and print them. You can
print PDF files and TIFF files.
To start the ContentsBridge Utility, double-click the [ContentsBridge] shortcut on the desktop.
11.2.2 Updating Software

The latest software is available on our official web site. The communication fee shall be borne by users.
278 User Guide

11.3 Using the Address Book
The address book is a feature used for storing destinations. Fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and SMB or FTP
server addresses can be registered as destinations. The procedures to register/edit/delete destinations vary
depending on the destination type.
• Fax numbers/e-mail addresses
You can register/edit/delete fax numbers and e-mail addresses from the operator panel, CentreWare
Internet Services, and Address Book Editor.
• Server addresses
You can register/edit/delete server addresses from the Address Book Editor.
11.3.1 Registering Destinations/Groups in the

Address Book
You can register contacts and groups in the address book.
• Contact
Fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and server addresses can be registered. Both a fax number and e-mail
address can be assigned in one contact.
Note
• For server addresses, you can register up to 32 contacts. For fax numbers/e-mail addresses, you can register up to 120
contacts.
• Group
Enables you to select multiple destinations from those registered in the address book and put them
together as a single group. This feature is useful when you want to send the same document to multiple
destinations at one time.
Note
• You can register up to 6 groups. For each group, you can register up to 120 contacts.
• Server addresses cannot be registered in a group.
Registering Fax Numbers/E-mail Addresses

Note
• Use the Address Book Editor to register server addresses in the address book.
Refer
• To use CentreWare Internet Services, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
• To use Address Book Editor, see the Address Book Editor help.
 Registering Contacts
2. Tap [Address Book].

3. Tap > [Add Contact].
4. Tap [Name].
5. Enter a name, and then tap [OK].
Note
• The name you specified in [Name] is also entered in the [Index Key] box automatically as the index name. Tap the box if
you want to rename the index name.
• The destinations are listed in order by their index names entered in the [Index Key] box.
6. Tap [Enter an Email Address].
If you do not register an e-mail address, proceed to step 8.
7. Enter an e-mail address, and then tap [OK].
8. Tap [Enter a fax number.].
If you do not register a fax number, proceed to step 10.
9. Enter a fax number, and then tap [OK].
10. If you want to register this address as a favorite, tap . If not, skip this step.
Note
• Once you register a contact as a favorite, you can easily and quickly select it from the favorites list in the address book.
11. Tap [OK].
 Registering Destinations in a Group
3. Tap > [Add Group].

4. Tap [Email] or [Fax] to select the type of destination to register.
5. Tap [Enter a group name.].
6. Enter a group name, and then tap [OK].
Note
• The registered groups are listed by index name in the address book.
• The name you specified in [Name] is also entered in the [Index Key] box automatically as the index name. Tap the box if
you want to rename the index name.
7. Tap [Add Member].
8. Tap all the destinations that you want to register in the group, and then tap [OK].
9. If you want to register this group as a favorite, tap . If not, skip this step.
Note
• Once you register a group as a favorite, you can easily and quickly select it from the favorites list in the address book.
10. Tap [OK].
280 User Guide

11.3.2 Specifying Destinations From the Address
Book
This section describes how to specify fax and e-mail destinations using the address book.
Note
• For details about how to register destinations, see "Registering Destinations/Groups in the Address Book (P.279)."

2. Tap [Fax] or [Scan to Email].
3. Tap or .
4. Tap the desired address.
Note
• indicates a contact, and indicates a group.
• The following keys help you to find your desired destination:
- displays only destinations registered as favorites.
- enables you to search for destinations by entering a search keyword.
5. Tap [Send] or [OK].
11.3.3 Editing/Deleting Destinations in the Address

Book
This section describes how to edit or delete destinations registered in the address book.
Editing/Deleting Fax Numbers/E-mail Addresses

Note
• Edit/delete server addresses by using Address Book Editor.
 Editing/Deleting Contacts

3. Tap the contact you want to edit or delete.
Note
4. To edit the contact, tap [Edit].
To delete the contact, tap [Delete Contact] and proceed to step 6.
5. Tap the desired item to edit.

Note
• If you want to register this contact as a favorite, tap .
• To delete the e-mail address or fax number, tap .
6. Tap [OK].
 Editing/Deleting Groups
282 User Guide

3. Tap the group you want to edit or delete.
Note
4. To edit the group, tap [Edit].
To delete the group, tap [Delete Group] and proceed to step 6.
5. Tap the desired item to edit.

Note
• If you want to register this destination as a favorite, tap .
• To delete the e-mail address or fax number, tap .
• To add a contact to a group, perform the following procedure.
1 Tap [Add Member].
2 Tap the contact you want to add to display the check mark.
3 Tap [OK].
6. Tap [OK].

11.3.4 Using the Address Book in an LDAP Server
You can search and specify fax numbers or e-mail addresses registered in an external LDAP server. To access the
server from the machine, you need to register the server settings in the machine using CentreWare Internet
Services.
Note
• To configure the settings of the external LDAP server, contact your system administrator.
Preparing to Access an LDAP Server

Set the following items using CentreWare Internet Services.
• Authentication type
• LDAP server address
• LDAP attribute names
Refer
• For details about how to start CentreWare Internet Services, see "Starting CentreWare Internet Services (P.273)."
 Setting an Authentication Type

Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
4. Click [System] on the left pane of the screen.
284 User Guide

5. Click [Security].
6. Click [Authentication System].

7. In the [Authentication Protocol], select [LDAP] as the authentication method, and then click [OK].
Note
• When the server you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select [Kerberos (Windows ADS)] as the
authentication method. Also, enter the setting information on the Kerberos server in [Kerberos (Windows ADS)] in
[Protocols]. For details, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
 Setting the LDAP Server Address
Note
• When SSL/TLS communication is required to access the LDAP server, you need to specify SSL/TLS settings in the machine
For details, see "Using the Encryption Feature (P.334)."
Note
[About].

192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
5. Click [LDAP] in [Protocols].
6. Click [LDAP Servers/Directory Services].
7. Configure the server settings.

Refer
8. Click [OK].
286 User Guide

 Setting the LDAP Attribute Names
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
5. Click [LDAP] in [Protocols].

6. Click [LDAP User Mappings].
7. Specify the attribute names used in the LDAP server.

Note
• If the attribute names are not customized in the LDAP server, leave the settings in this step as they are by default.
8. Click [OK].
Specifying Destinations From an LDAP Server

Note
• To specify destinations from an LDAP server, you need to enable [LDAP Address Book]. For details, see "[LDAP Address
Book] (P.268)."

2. Tap [Fax] or [Scan to Email].
3. Tap or , and then tap .

Note
• If the [Select Address Book] screen is displayed, tap [LDAP Address Book].
4. Enter a search keyword.
5. Tap [Search].
6. Tap the desired address.
288 User Guide

7. For [Fax]:
Tap [Send].
For [Scan to Email]:
Tap [OK] > [Send].

11.4 Using Print Accounting
11.4.1 Overview
When the Print Accounting feature is enabled, only users registered in the machine (registered users) can print.
This feature can also restrict each user's printing and count up printed pages.
To print, the registered user needs to use a print driver or an application provided by Fuji Xerox on which the user
account information is specified.
Note
• You can register up to 50 users.
The following illustration shows how the machine works with Print Accounting.
Setting restrictions on each user
Account information Printing restrictions

Color print
Color print limit Black and white
User name Password : Permitted
- : Prohibited (pages) print limit (pages)
A xxxx 5,000 5,000

B yyyy - 3,000
C zzzz 9,000 7,000
User registered in the machine
Sending a print job with account information
Account information Printing the job
User name Password

User Counting up the
authentication number of printed
A xxxx pages
User not registered in the machine
Printing prohibited Printing a report to check

the printing usage
Print Accounting has the following features:

• "Permitting Only Registered Users to Print (P.291)"
• "Setting Printing Restrictions on Each Registered User (P.295)"
– "Permitting Printing Only in Black and White (P.296)"
– "Limiting the Number of Pages Printable in Color/Black and White (P.301)"
• "Permitting Print Jobs Without Account Information (P.307)"
– "Permitting Printing in Color/Black and White (P.308)"
– "Permitting Printing Only in Black and White (P.308)"
290 User Guide

11.4.2 Permitting Only Registered Users to Print
To use this feature, settings need to be configured on the print driver/application, the operator panel, and
CentreWare Internet Services.
Configuring Authentication Settings on the Print

Driver/Application
Specify account information (user name and password) that is required for authentication when printing from a
print driver or an application provided by Fuji Xerox.
The following procedure uses the PCL driver on Windows® 7 and Windows® 10 as examples.
1. Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].

For Windows® 10, right-click the Start button, and then click [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] >
[Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon for the machine, and select [Printer properties].
3. Click [Configuration].

4. Click [Accounting].
5. From the [Accounting System] drop-down list box, select [Standard Accounting].
6. Specify [Account Mode].

Refer
• For details about the settings, see the PCL driver help.
7. Specify a user account (user name and password).
• When displaying a dialog box to enter a user account every time a job is submitted:
a Select [Prompt User for Entry when Submitting Job].
b Select the [Display Last Entered User Details] and [Mask User ID (***)] check boxes as necessary.
• When always using the same user account by using Windows® login name as user name:
a Select [Always Use Default User Details].
b From the [Specify Job Owner Name] drop-down list box, select [Use Login Name].
c Specify [Password].
• When always using the same user account by specifying a user name manually:
b From the [Specify Job Owner Name] drop-down list box, select [Enter owner name].
292 User Guide

c Specify [User ID] and [Password].
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK].
Enabling Print Accounting on the Operator Panel

2. Tap [Device].
4. Tap [Print Accounting] > [On].

Registering Users on CentreWare Internet Services

Register user account information (user name and password) that has been set on the print driver or an
application in the machine. To configure the settings, login to CentreWare Internet Services as the
administrator.
Note
[About].

192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
4. Click [Accounting] on the left pane of the screen.
294 User Guide

5. Click [Add].
6. Set the [User Name], [Password], and [Retype Password], and then click [Add].
Note
• The number of characters you can enter for the user names and passwords are as follows:
User name: 1 - 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols
Password: 4 - 12 alphanumeric characters and symbols
• The following symbols cannot be used in the user name.
"+;<>?[]`{}|
11.4.3 Setting Printing Restrictions on Each

Registered User
To use this feature, settings need to be configured on the print driver/application, the operator panel, and
You can set the following restrictions:
• "Permitting Printing Only in Black and White (P.296)"
• "Limiting the Number of Pages Printable in Color/Black and White (P.301)"

Permitting Printing Only in Black and White
 Configuring Authentication Settings on the Print Driver/Application
Specify account information (user name and password) that is required for authentication when printing from a
print driver or an application provided by Fuji Xerox.

296 User Guide


Refer
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK].
 Enabling Print Accounting on the Operator Panel
2. Tap [Device].


 Registering Users and Configuring Usage Restriction Settings on CentreWare Internet
Services
application in the machine, and set the printing restrictions. To configure the settings, login to CentreWare
Internet Services as the administrator.
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
298 User Guide

5. Click [Add].

Note
"+;<>?[]`{}|
A user account is added.
7. Click the added user account.
300 User Guide

8. Click [Edit].
9. Tap next to [Color Prints] to clear the check mark.
10. Click [OK].

Note
• The color print jobs from a user with restrictions on performing color printing are canceled. To allow printing in black and
white instead of canceling the jobs, follow the procedure below to enable [Auto Color To Mono Print].
1 Press the <Home> button.
2 Tap [Device].
3 Tap [Security Settings] > [Print Accounting].
4 Tap [Auto Color To Mono Print] > [On].
5 Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again.
Limiting the Number of Pages Printable in Color/Black and White

Set the maximum number of pages that can be printed in color or in black and white.

 Configuring Authentication Settings on the Print Driver/Application
Specify account information (a user name and a password) that is required for authentication when printing on
our print driver or application.

302 User Guide


Refer
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [OK].
 Enabling Print Accounting on the Operator Panel
2. Tap [Device].


Services
application in the machine, and set the printing restrictions. To configure the settings, login to CentreWare
Internet Services as the administrator.
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
304 User Guide

5. Click [Add].

Note
"+;<>?[]`{}|
306 User Guide

8. Click [Edit].
9. Enter the desired values in the [Limit] under [Color Prints].
10. Enter the desired values in the [Limit] under [Black & White Prints].
11. Click [OK].
11.4.4 Permitting Print Jobs Without Account

Information
When [Print Accounting] is enabled, printing jobs without account information (user name and password) is not
permitted. To permit printing, enable [Unauthenticated User Print]. You can also permit only black and white
printing.
The jobs without account information are the following:
• Jobs generated using other company's print drivers or utilities
• Jobs submitted using the following features:
– Print from Cloud Service Hub

– USB Direct Print
– AirPrint
– Google Cloud Print
– Mopria Print Service
Note
• Even if a print driver or an application provided by Fuji Xerox is used, jobs generated with the print driver's or
application's user authentication settings disabled are regarded as jobs without account information.
Permitting Printing in Color/Black and White

2. Tap [Device].

4. Tap [Print Accounting].
5. Tap [Unauthenticated User Print] > [Enable].
6. Tap [Auto Color To Mono Print] > [Off].
Permitting Printing Only in Black and White

2. Tap [Device].

4. Tap [Print Accounting].
5. Tap [Unauthenticated User Print] > [Enable].
6. Tap [Auto Color To Mono Print] > [On].
308 User Guide

11.4.5 Checking Printing Usage
Print a Printer Meter report to check the current settings of printing restrictions and the total number of printed
pages.
Refer
• For details about how to print the Printer Meter report, see "Checking by User or Paper Size (P.361)."

11.5 Using Copy Accounting
11.5.1 Overview
When the Copy Accounting feature is enabled, only users registered in the machine (registered users) can copy.
This feature can also restrict each registered user's copying and count up copied pages. To make a copy,
registered users are required to login to their user account from the operator panel.
Note
Refer
• This feature is available only when [Service Lock] and [User Authentication] are disabled. For details about the settings,
see "[Service Lock] (P.256)" and "[User Authentication] (P.257)."
The following illustration shows how the machine works with Copy Accounting.
Setting restrictions on each user
Account information Copying restrictions

Color copy
Color copy limit Black and white
User name Password : Permitted
(pages) copy limit (pages)
- : Prohibited
A xxxx 5,000 5,000
B yyyy - 3,000
C zzzz 9,000 7,000
User registered in the machine
Login to the machine with a registered account
Account information Make a copy
User name Password

Counting up the
User authentication number of copied
A xxxx pages
User not registered in the machine
Copying prohibited Printing a report to check

copy usage
Copy Accounting has the following features:

• "Permitting Only Registered Users to Copy (P.311)"
• "Setting Copying Restrictions on Each Registered User (P.313)"
– "Permitting Copying Only in Black and White (P.314)"
– "Setting the Limit for Color/Black and White Copying (P.318)"
310 User Guide

11.5.2 Permitting Only Registered Users to Copy
To use this feature, settings need to be configured on the operator panel and CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
• You can also manage the use of the copy function with the User Authentication feature. For details, see "Using the User
Authentication Feature (P.324)."
Enabling Copy Accounting on the Operator Panel

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Security Settings] > [Copy Accounting].
4. Tap [On].
Registering Users on CentreWare Internet Services

Register user account information (user name and password) for users who are permitted to use the copy
function. To configure the settings, login to CentreWare Internet Services as the administrator.
Note
[About].

192.0.2.1
Note
Refer
312 User Guide

5. Click [Add].
Note
"+;<>?[]`{}|
11.5.3 Setting Copying Restrictions on Each

Registered User
To use this feature, settings need to be configured on the operator panel and CentreWare Internet Services.
You can set the following restrictions:
• "Permitting Copying Only in Black and White (P.314)"
• "Setting the Limit for Color/Black and White Copying (P.318)"

Permitting Copying Only in Black and White
 Enabling Copy Accounting on the Operator Panel
2. Tap [Device].
4. Tap [On].
Services
Register user account information (user name and password) in the machine, and set the copying restrictions. To
configure the settings, login to CentreWare Internet Services as the administrator.
Note
[About].
314 User Guide

192.0.2.1
Note
Refer

5. Click [Add].
Note
"+;<>?[]`{}|
316 User Guide


8. Click [Edit].

9. Tap next to [Color Copies] to clear the check mark.
10. Click [OK].
Setting the Limit for Color/Black and White Copying

Set the maximum number of pages that can be copied in color or in black and white.
 Enabling Copy Accounting on the Operator Panel

2. Tap [Device].
4. Tap [On].
318 User Guide

Services
Register user account information (user name and password) in the machine, and set the copying restrictions. To
configure the settings, login to CentreWare Internet Services as the administrator.
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer

5. Click [Add].
Note
"+;<>?[]`{}|
320 User Guide


8. Click [Edit].

9. Enter the desired values in the [Limit] under [Color Copies].
10. Enter the desired values in the [Limit] under [Black & White Copies].
11. Click [OK].
11.5.4 Using Copy Accounting

When using the copy function with the Copy Accounting feature enabled, registered users need to login to their
user account registered in the machine.
 Logging In
2. Tap [Copy] or [ID Card Copy].
3. Tap the user account to login.
322 User Guide

When you login, your user name is displayed on the upper right corner.
Note
• The machine automatically logs out in the following cases:
- When the machine enters the sleep mode
- When the time period specified on [Auto Clear] passes with no operation of the machine
 Logging Out
2. Tap the user name on the upper right corner.
3. Tap [Log Out].
11.5.5 Checking Copying Usage

Print a Printer Meter report to check the current settings of copying restrictions and the total number of copied
pages.
Refer
• For details about how to print the Printer Meter report, see "Checking by User or Paper Size (P.361)."

11.6 Using the User Authentication
Feature
11.6.1 Overview
When the User Authentication feature is enabled, you can give the registered users permission to use the
features, or limit the features that unregistered users (guest users) can use. Furthermore, you can limit the
features that each registered user can use.
To use the machine, registered users need to login to their user account from the operator panel. If a registered
user uses the machine without logging in, the user will be treated as a guest user.
Restrictions can be applied on the following features:
• Customizing the [Home] screen and widget tiles
• Copying
• Scanning ([Scan to Email]/[Scan to Network]/[Scan to WSD]/[Scan to USB Drive])
• Faxing*
• USB Direct Print
* The Direct Fax feature is not restricted. If the fax receive mode is set to [TEL Mode], receiving faxes is also restricted.
Note
• The User Authentication feature is available only when [Panel Lock Settings] is enabled, and [Copy Accounting] is
disabled. For details about the settings, see "[Panel Lock] (P.255)" and "[Copy Accounting] (P.258)."
• The features that are restricted by [Service Lock] cannot be used even if they are permitted by the User Authentication
feature.
For details about the [Service Lock] setting, see "[Service Lock] (P.256)."
324 User Guide

The following illustration shows how the machine works with the User Authentication feature.
Setting usage restrictions on each registered user Setting usage restrictions on guest users
Registered user User A User B

· Copying prohibited
User name ABC DEF Usage

· Scanning prohibited
restrictions
Password XXXX XXXX · Faxing prohibited
Usage · Copying
· No restrictions
restrictions prohibited
Registered user Guest user

Login to the machine
with a registered account User
authentication
Unable to use the

Account information
restricted functions
User name Password
ABC xxxx
The work flow from configuring User Authentication settings to using the feature is as follows:
"Enabling the Panel Lock and User Authentication Feature on the Operator Panel (P.325)"
"Registering Users and Configuring Restriction Settings on CentreWare Internet Services (P.327)"
"Using the User Authentication Feature (P.332)"
11.6.2 Configuring the User Authentication Feature

Settings
To use the User Authentication feature, settings need to be configured on the operator panel and on
Enabling the Panel Lock and User Authentication Feature on the

Operator Panel

2. Tap [Device].


7. Tap .
8. Tap [User Authentication] > [Local Authentication].
9. Tap [OK].
326 User Guide

Registering Users and Configuring Restriction Settings on
CentreWare Internet Services
Register user account information (user name and password), and set the usage restrictions for each feature on
guest users. Also, set the usage restrictions for each feature on the registered users as needed. To configure the
settings, login to CentreWare Internet Services as the administrator.
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Refer

4. Click [Permissions] on the left pane of the screen.
5. Click [Add].
328 User Guide

Note
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6 as needed to add user accounts.

8. Set the usage restrictions for each feature.
• To set the usage restrictions on a guest user:
a Click [Setup].
b Click the desired setting item, and then change the setting.
Refer
• For details about the setting items, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
c Click [OK].
330 User Guide

• To set the usage restrictions on a registered user:
a Click the added user account.
b Click [Edit].

c Click the desired setting item, and then change the setting.
Refer
• For details about the setting items, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
d Click [OK].
11.6.3 Using the User Authentication Feature

When using the machine with the User Authentication feature enabled, registered users need to login to their
user account registered in the machine. If a registered user uses the machine without logging in, the user will be
treated as a guest user.
 Logging In
332 User Guide

3. Tap the user account to login.

When you login, your user name is displayed on the upper right corner.
Note
• The machine automatically logs out in the following cases:
- When the machine enters the sleep mode
- When the time period specified on [Auto Clear] passes with no operation of the machine
 Logging Out
2. Tap the user name on the upper right corner.
3. Tap [Log Out].

11.7 Using the Encryption Feature
The encryption feature encrypts the data to be transmitted, and prevents the interception or falsification of the
data. To use the authentication feature on the machine, digital certificates are required.
Note
• The machine supports the following kinds of digital certificates:
- Self-signed certificate made with CentreWare Internet Services
- Certificate signed by the certificate authorities (CA)
• The machine can import the digital certificates of the following formats:
- PKCS#12 (DER encoded)
- PKCS#7 (for CSR) (DER encoded)
Use CentreWare Internet Services to configure the encryption feature.
11.7.1 Preparing for Encryption

Enabling the SSL/TLS Server Communication
Before using the encryption feature with digital certificates, enable the SSL/TLS server communication.
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Note
6. Click [SSL/TLS Settings].
334 User Guide

7. Click for [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication] to display the check mark.
8. Click [OK].
Generating a Digital Certificate

The method differs depending on whether you generate a self-signed certificate using CentreWare Internet
Services, or you use a certificate signed by the certificate authorities (CA).
 Generating a Self-Signed Certificate

Note
[About].

192.0.2.1
Note
Note
6. Click [Security Certificates].
7. Make sure that [Device Certificate] is selected, and then click [Create].
8. Click [Create Self-Signed Certificate].
9. Select the algorithm for the digital signature from [Hash Algorithm].
10. Select the size of the public key from [Public Key Length].
336 User Guide

11. Specify the validity period of the certificate in [Validity Period].
12. Click [Create].
13. Click [Close].
 Using a Certificate Signed by the Certificate Authorities (CA)
When using a certificate signed by the certificate authorities (CA), generate the certificate signing request
(CSR), and receive the signed certificate from the certificate authorities (CA).
Generating the Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Note
[About].
192.0.2.1
Note
Note
7. Make sure that [Device Certificate] is selected, and then click [Create].
8. Click [Create Certificate Signing Request (CSR)].

9. Specify each item.
10. Click [Create].

A CSR file is saved to your computer.
Important
• Once the CSR file is downloaded, do not download another CSR before you import the certificate. If you generate
another CSR, the secret key stored in the machine does not match with the secret key included in the signed certificate,
and you cannot import the certificate.
11. Send the CSR file to the certificate authority (CA) and receive the CA-signed certificate.
Note
• For details about how to send the CSR, follow the procedure specified by the certificate authority (CA).
Importing a Certificate Signed by the Certificate Authorities (CA)
Important
• Before importing a certificate file, backup the certificate file.
Note
• Make sure to use Internet Explorer to import the certificate.
• After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you perform exporting.
Note
[About].
338 User Guide

192.0.2.1
Note
Note
7. Click [Device Certificate], and then select [Trusted Root CA Certificate] or [Intermediate CA
Certificate].
8. Click [Import].
9. Click [Select], and select the file to be imported.
10. Enter a password corresponding to the certificate file to be imported.
Note
• The password is not necessary when importing a PKCS#7 format certificate, which has the filename extension of p7b.
11. Enter the password again to confirm it.
12. Click [Import].
Selecting the Certificate

Note
[About].

192.0.2.1
Note
Note
7. Click [Device Certificate], and then select [Trusted Root CA Certificate], [Intermediate CA Certificate],
or [Other Certificate].
8. Click the certificate you want to use.
9. Check the certificate.
Note
• Make sure that [Enable] is displayed in the [Validity] column for the selected certificate.
10. Click [Close].
340 User Guide

12. Click [Device Certificate - Server], and then select the certificate to be used.
13. Click [OK].

Refer
• For details about deleting or exporting digital certificates, see the CentreWare Internet Services Help.
11.7.2 Setting the Encryption Features

The following encryption features can be used:
• Encrypting the HTTP communication and the IPP printing
• Encrypting the SMTP communication
• Encrypting the LDAP communication
• Wireless LAN connection with WPA-Enterprise
Encrypting the HTTP Communication and the IPP Printing

When the communication between the web browser and the machine is encrypted, enter the address in the
address text box, starting with "https" instead of "http."
• Example of entering the IP address
https://192.0.2.1/ (for IPv4 network)
https://[2001:DB8::1234]/ (for IPv6 network)
• Example of entering the Internet address
https://myhost.example.com/
To encrypt the IPP communication (Internet printing), enter the URL of the machine, starting with "https"
instead of "http" when you add the machine to your computer.
Encrypting the SMTP Communication

Note
[About].

192.0.2.1
Note
Note
7. Click [SMTP - SSL/TLS Communication], and then select the connection method.
8. Click [OK].
Encrypting the LDAP Communication

Note
[About].
342 User Guide

192.0.2.1
Note
Note
7. Click for [LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication] to display the check mark.
8. Click [OK].
Wireless LAN Connection With WPA-Enterprise

 For EAP-TLS
Note
[About].

192.0.2.1
Note
Note
5. Click [Wi-Fi] in [Connections].
6. From the [Encryption Type] in [Security Settings], select [WPA2 Enterprise].
Note
• This setting is available only when [Infrastructure] is specified for [Network Type].
7. From [Authentication Method], select [EAP-TLS].
8. Click [Root Certificate], and then select the root certificate.
9. Click [Client Certificate], and then select the client certificate.
10. Specify [EAP-Identity].
11. Click [OK].
 For PEAPv0 MS-CHAPv2, EAP-TTLS/PAP, and EAP-TTLS/CHAP
Note
[About].
344 User Guide

192.0.2.1
Note
Note
5. Click [Wi-Fi] in [Connections].
6. From the [Encryption Type] in [Security Settings], select [WPA2 Enterprise].
Note
• This setting is available only when [Infrastructure] is specified for [Network Type].
7. From [Authentication Method], select [PEAPv0 MS-CHAPv2], [EAP-TTLS/PAP], or [EAP-TTLS/CHAP].
8. Click [Root Certificate], and then select the root certificate.
9. Specify [EAP-Identity], [Login Name], [Password], and [Retype Password].
10. Click [OK].

12 Maintenance
12.1 Replacing Consumables...................................................................................... 347

12.2 Cleaning the Machine ......................................................................................... 354
12.3 Counting up the Number of Printed Pages ................................................. 361
346 User Guide

12.1 Replacing Consumables
The following consumables are supplied as the replaceable items.
• Toner cartridge
• Drum cartridge
• Waste toner container
WARNING
• Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product, toner cartridge or toner bottle.
It may catch fire by electric sparks inside a vacuum cleaner and cause explosion.
Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off the spills. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
• Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause
burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its
disposal.
• Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its
disposal.
CAUTION
• Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner,
spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately.
• When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner
spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.
• If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in the eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is
gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a physician
immediately.
Important
• When working on the machine with the power turned off, check that the data LED is off before turning off the machine.
The print data and stored data in the memory is cleared when the machine is turned off.
Handling Consumables/Periodic Replacement Parts
• Do not store boxes of consumables/periodic replacement parts upright.
• Do not unpack consumables/periodic replacement parts before use. Avoid storing consumables/periodic
replacement parts in the following locations:
– In high temperature and humid locations
– Near heat-generating devices
– Areas exposed to direct sunlight
– Dusty areas
• When using consumables/periodic replacement parts, carefully read precautions for use. Precautions for
use are instructed on their boxes or containers, or a precaution sheet is included in their packages.
• We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
• When calling our Customer Support Center to order consumables/periodical replacement parts, have the
product codes ready.
• The use of consumables/periodic replacement parts not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair machine
quality and performance. Use only consumables/periodic replacement parts recommended by Fuji Xerox.
12.1.1 Replacing the Toner Cartridges

Overview
The following messages appear on the touch panel according to the remaining amount of toner.
12 Maintenance 347
The messages for the yellow toner cartridge are used as examples.
Message Remaining Page Yield* Machine Status and Action

"Order Toner Cartridge: Factory-installed toner cartridge: The toner has become low. Prepare a new one.
Yellow [Y]" Approximately 800 pages (K), 500
pages (C/M/Y)
Standard capacity toner cartridge:

Approximately 1,800 pages (K), 600
pages (C/M/Y)
High capacity toner cartridge:

Approximately 2,500 pages (K), 2,800
pages (C/M/Y)
"Replace Toner [Y] Open - The toner cartridge has become empty.
the Front Cover. Then Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
replace the Yellow Toner
[Y] Cartridge. Follow the
instructions provided
with the new supplies
box."
*
The remaining page yield differs depending on printing conditions, contents of documents, and frequency of turning on/off the machine.
Important
• When placing a used toner cartridge on the floor or on a table, place a few sheets of paper under the toner cartridge to
catch any toner that may spill.
• Do not reuse old toner cartridges once you remove them from the machine. Print quality may deteriorate.
• Do not shake or pound the used toner cartridges. The remaining toner may spill.
• We recommend using the toner cartridges within one year after unpacking them.
• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair machine quality and performance. Use only
toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge

1. Make sure that the machine is not operating, and then open the front cover.
348 User Guide

2. Hold the handle of the toner cartridge, and then pull it out.
Important
• Pull out the toner cartridge slowly. Otherwise, toner may spill from the cartridge.
Note
• If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.
3. Unpack a new toner cartridge of the same color as the uninstalled toner cartridge.
4. Gently shake the new toner cartridge 10 times to distribute the toner evenly.
5. Hold the toner cartridge so that the arrow on the label is on the top side, and then insert it until it
stops.
6. Close the front cover.
12.1.2 Replacing the Drum Cartridges

Important
• Protect the drum cartridges against bright light. If the front cover remains open for more than 3 minutes, print quality
may deteriorate.
• When replacing the drum cartridge, refer to the replacement instructions provided with each new consumable box.
12 Maintenance 349
Overview
The machine has drum cartridges of four colors: black (K), yellow (Y), magenta (M), and cyan (C).
When a drum cartridge reaches its usable life-span, the following messages appear on the touch panel.
The following messages use black drum cartridge as examples.
Message Remaining Page Yield Machine Status and Action

"Reorder Drum Cartridge Approximately 2,000 pages for black The drum cartridge is near the end of its life.
[R1]." (R1), 1,600 pages for cyan Prepare a new one.
(R2)/magenta (R3)/yellow (R4).
"Order Drum Cartridge Approximately 600 pages for black The drum cartridge has almost reached the
[R1]" (R1), 500 pages for cyan (R2)/magenta end of its life. Prepare a new one.
(R3)/yellow (R4).
"Replace the Drum - The drum cartridge has reached the end of its
Cartridge [R1] now. life. Replace the old drum cartridge with a new
Follow the instructions one.
provided with the new
supplies box."
Note
• When [End of Drum Life] is set to [Continue Printing] beforehand, the machine does not stop even when a drum
cartridge reaches the end of its life, and you can continue to operate the machine. As the printing quality is not
guaranteed, it is recommended that the drum cartridge should be replaced with a new one. For details about the
settings, see "[End of Drum Life] (P.268)."
12.1.3 Replacing the Waste Toner Container

Overview
When a waste toner container reaches the end of its life, the following messages appear on the touch panel.
Message Remaining Page Yield* Machine Status and Action

"Order Waste Toner Approximately 1,000 pages The waste toner container is near the end of its
Container [R5]." life. Prepare a new one.
"Replace Waste Toner - The waste toner container has reached the end
Container" of its life. Replace the waste toner container
with a new one.
*
The remaining page yield differs depending on printing conditions, contents of documents, and frequency of turning on/off the machine.
Important
• Do not touch the five gray-colored sponge parts on the back side of the waste toner container. Your hands may get
stained with toner.
• When you replace the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying paper on the floor
beforehand.
• Proper disposal of used waste toner container is required. Return the old waste toner container to our Customer Support
Center.
• The use of waste toner container not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair machine quality and performance. Use
only waste toner container recommended by Fuji Xerox.
350 User Guide

Replacing the Waste Toner Container
2. Turn the lock lever counterclockwise.
3. Unlock the waste toner container.
4. To prevent the toner from spilling, gently pull the waste toner container upward with the side that was
attached to the machine facing up.
12 Maintenance 351
Important
• Take care not to drop the waste toner container while you are removing it.
• After removing the waste toner container, do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Your hands may get stained
with toner.
• Do not lay the waste toner container as shown in the illustration. This may cause the toner to spill out.
5. Put the used waste toner container into the plastic bag that came with the new waste toner container
and seal the bag.
6. Prepare a new waste toner container.
7. Set the two indented parts on the bottom of the waste toner container into the brackets on the
machine, and then insert the waste toner container.
8. Push the waste toner container until it clicks.
352 User Guide

9. Turn the lock lever clockwise.
12 Maintenance 353
12.2 Cleaning the Machine
WARNING
• When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning materials may
result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners to avoid catching fire and explosion.
CAUTION
• When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live machine interior may cause electric
shock.
Important
12.2.1 Cleaning Outside the Machine

Important
• Using volatile solvents such as benzine or thinner, or spraying with insecticide may cause discoloration, deformation, or
cracks on the covers or exterior.
• When the exterior gets too much wet, the machine may break down, or documents may be torn while copying.
1. Wipe the exterior of the machine with a soft, moistened, and tightly-squeezed cloth.
Important
• Use only water or neutral detergent, and never use other solutions.
Note
• When stains cannot be removed easily, wipe lightly with the soft cloth slightly moistened with a thin neutral detergent
solution.
2. Wipe the moisture off with a dry soft cloth.
354 User Guide

12.2.2 Cleaning the Touch Panel
1. Wipe the touch panel surface lightly with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent or alcohol.
Important
• When you moisten a cloth with a neutral detergent or alcohol, make sure that no drips come of the cloth. When the cloth
is heavily soaked with detergent or alcohol, squeeze the cloth lightly.
• Using volatile solvents such as benzine or thinner or spraying with insecticide may cause discoloration, deformation, or
cracks on the covers or exterior.
• Do not wipe the panel strongly, as it may damage the panel. Wipe lightly.
12.2.3 Cleaning Inside the Machine

Cleaning the LED Print Head
If you have image quality problems such as stripes appearing on copied or printed outputs, clean the LED print
head.
2. Turn the lock lever counterclockwise.
12 Maintenance 355
3. Unlock the waste toner container.
4. To prevent the toner from spilling, gently pull the waste toner container upward with the side that was
attached to the machine facing up.
Important
• Take care not to drop the waste toner container while you are removing it.
• After removing the waste toner container, do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Your hands may get stained
with toner.
• Do not lay the waste toner container as shown in the illustration. This may cause the toner to spill out.
356 User Guide

5. Remove the cleaning rod on the back side of the front cover.
6. Insert the cleaning rod into one of the four holes of the tabs on the drum cartridges until it stops, and
then pull it out.
Note
• Insert the cleaning rod with the pad side up.
• It is not necessary to move the cleaning rod back and forth repeatedly.
7. Repeat step 6 for the other three holes.

8. Return the cleaning rod to the back side of the front cover.
9. Set the two indented parts on the bottom of the waste toner container into the brackets on the
machine, and then reinsert the removed waste toner container.
12 Maintenance 357
10. Push the waste toner container until it clicks.
11. Turn the lock lever clockwise.
12.2.4 Clean the Document Glass Cover, Document

Glass, Document Presser, and Narrow Glass
Strip
If the document glass cover or the document glass get stained, smudges may appear on copy, fax, or scan
results, and the machine may not detect the document sizes properly. To ensure clean output results at all times,
perform cleaning about once a month.
Important
• Do not use chemicals such as benzine or thinner. Doing so may damage the paint or coating on plastic parts.
• When the exterior gets too much wet, the machine may break down, or documents may be torn while copying, faxing, or
scanning.
Note
solution.
358 User Guide

2. Wipe the surface of the document presser, document glass cover, document glass, and narrow glass
strip with a soft, moistened cloth. Wipe the moisture off with a dry soft cloth or paper towel until they
are completely dry.
Note
• Be careful not to damage the document presser.
1
2
4
3
1 Document Presser
2 Document Glass Cover
3 Document Glass
4 Narrow Glass Strip
12.2.5 Cleaning the Feed Rollers of the Duplex

Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
If the feed rollers of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) get stained, smudges may appear on copy,
fax, or scan results, and a document jam may occur.
To ensure clean output results at all times, perform cleaning about once a month.
Important
• Do not use chemicals such as benzine or thinner. Doing so may damage the paint or coating on plastic parts.
• When the exterior gets too much wet, the machine may break down, or documents may be torn while copying, faxing, or
scanning.
1. Pull up the handle and open the document feeder top cover of the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) until it stops.
Note
• Open the cover slowly.
12 Maintenance 359
2. While turning the rollers, wipe them with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water.
Important
• Use a cloth firmly wrung to prevent water drops from falling into the machine. If water gets into the machine, it may
cause the machine to malfunction.
Note
solution.
3. Close the document feeder top cover of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) until it clicks,
and then make sure that there is no gap on the front or rear of the cover.
360 User Guide

12.3 Counting up the Number of Printed
Pages
The total number of printed pages can be checked by meter, by user, or by paper size. One-sided print is counted
as one job, and two-sided print is counted as two.
Note
• You can also check the number of printed pages on CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see the CentreWare
12.3.1 Checking by Meter

There are three meters classified according to color mode.

2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Billing Meters].
Refer
• For details about the function of each meter, see "[Billing Meters] (P.234)."
12.3.2 Checking by User or Paper Size

Check the number of pages on the printed report.
Note
• When [Print Accounting] and [Copy Accounting] are disabled, you can check the number of pages for each paper size.
• When [Print Accounting] is enabled, print jobs without account information are described as [No Account User] in the
report.
12 Maintenance 361
2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Information Pages] > [Printer Meter].
362 User Guide

13 Troubleshooting
13.1 Clearing Jams.......................................................................................................... 364

13.2 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 370
13.3 Understanding Machine Messages................................................................ 389
13 Troubleshooting 363
13.1 Clearing Jams
WARNING
• If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Do not pull out
a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.
CAUTION
• Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped around the
fusing unit or the heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product immediately and
contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Important
13.1.1 Clearing Documents

1. Remove the remaining documents from the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
2. Pull up the handle and open the document feeder top cover of the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) until it stops.
3. If the document is yet to be fed into the feeder, remove it.
364 User Guide

4. If the displayed message prompts you to turn the knob, turn it to convey the document to the top,
and then remove the document.
Important
• If the document is fed into the feeder, do not pull it out directly. This may cause the document to tear.
5. If the displayed message prompts you to open the inner cover of the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF), pull up the lever to open the inner cover.
Lever
6. Turn the knob to convey the document to the top, and then remove the document.
Important
• If the document is fed into the feeder, do not pull it out directly. This may cause the document to tear.
7. Close the inner cover of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
8. Close the document feeder top cover of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) until it clicks,
and then make sure that there is no gap on the front or rear of the cover.
9. If you cannot find the document, gently open the document glass cover. If you find the document,
remove it and close the document glass cover.
10. If you could not find the document in step 9, lift the document feeder tray and remove the document.
11. Gently return the document feeder tray to its original position.
13.1.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Note
• To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Left Side Cover [A]
Important
• When removing paper, there may be toner on the transfer belt (black film belt) inside the left side cover [A]. Do not
touch this transfer belt. Doing so may affect the image quality, or damage the transfer belt and it may need
replacement.
1. Open Tray 5 (bypass).
2. While lifting the release lever, gently open the left side cover [A].
366 User Guide

 Clearing Paper Jams From Near the Fusing Unit
1. Pull the handle [A1] downward.
2. Remove the jammed paper.

Note
• Make sure that you do not leave any shreds inside the machine.
3. Return the handle [A1] to its original position.

4. Pushing the center part of the left side cover [A], close the cover gently, and then close Tray 5
(bypass).
 Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Left Side Cover [A]
1. Lift the handle [A2] and remove the jammed paper by pulling it upward.
2. Return the handle [A2] to its original position.

3. Pushing the center part of the left side cover [A], close the cover gently, and then close Tray 5
(bypass).
Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Left Side Cover [B]
1. Pull the release lever and gently open the left side cover [B].

Note
• The paper may be jammed in the upper part where it is difficult to see. Check thoroughly for jammed paper.
• If the paper tears, make sure that there are no shreds in the machine.
3. Gently close the left side cover [B].
Clearing Paper Jams From Tray 1 and Tray 2

Refer
• For details about Tray 1, see "Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Left Side Cover [A] (P.366)."
• For details about Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (optional), see "Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Left Side Cover [B]
(P.368)."
2. If you cannot remove the jammed paper, pull the paper tray.
Important
• Pulling the paper tray after a paper jam without checking the location of the paper jam may cause the paper to tear and
remain inside the machine. This may cause a malfunction of the machine. Check the location of the paper jam on the
touch panel before attempting to clear the jam.
368 User Guide

Note
4. Gently push the paper tray until it stops.
Clearing Paper Jams From Tray 5 (Bypass)

1. Check the inside of Tray 5 (bypass) (around the paper feed entrance), and then remove the jammed
paper.
Important
• If multiple sheets of paper are loaded, remove all the paper while you clear the jam.
Note
13.2 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to solve the problems with the machine.
13.2.1 Menu Setting Problems

Problem Action
Menu settings changed from the Settings in the software, the print driver, or the printer utilities have precedence
operator panel have no effect. over the settings made on the operator panel.
13.2.2 Machine Problems

Check the machine status again if you suspect a malfunction.
Problem Possible Cause Action

The machine is not Is the machine turned off? Press <Power> button on the operator panel to turn on the
turned on. machine.
Is the power cord connected to an Turn off the machine, and then connect the power cord
electrical outlet? securely to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the machine.
Is the power cord disconnected?
The status LED is blinking The system of the machine or the Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again. If the problem
in orange. components installed may have a persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
trouble.
Is paper or a document jammed? Remove the jammed paper or document.
Refer
• If paper is jammed, see "Clearing Paper Jams
(P.366)," and if a document is jammed, see "Clearing
Documents (P.364)."
Is the front cover or other covers Follow the displayed message to solve the problem.
of the machine opened?
The touch panel is dark. Does <Power> button light The machine enters the power saver mode. Press <Power>
up? button on the operator panel to clear the power saver mode.
Is the brightness setting of the Adjust the [Display Brightness] setting.
touch panel turned down?
Refer
• For details, see "[Display Brightness] (P.235)."
Unable to print or copy. Is a message displayed on the Follow the displayed message to solve the problem. You can
touch panel? check messages that you closed from the sidebar screen.
Refer
• For details about the sidebar screen, see "Sidebar
(P.49)."
Is the memory full? Solve the problem by any of the following actions:
• Select [Standard] in [Image Quality], or use [Print Page
Mode], and then try printing again.
• Set the status of the unused port to [Disabled].
Is the print driver in offline mode? Open the printer icon and clear the check box for using the
print driver in offline mode in the printer menu.
370 User Guide

Printing does not start in Is the Ethernet cable or USB cable Check the Ethernet cable or USB cable connection. When
spite of the instruction. disconnected? Is the machine connecting to a wireless network, make sure that the Ethernet
connected to the wireless cable is disconnected from the machine and the optional
network? Wireless LAN Kit is installed, and then check that the machine
is connected to the wireless network.
Refer
• For details about connecting the Ethernet cable or
USB cable, see "Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet)
Network (P.25)" or "Connecting to a Computer With
USB (P.26)."
• For details about connecting to a wireless network,
see "Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.26)."
Is the computer environment Check the computer environment such as the print driver
configured properly? settings.
Is the protocol to use enabled? Enable the protocol to use.
Refer
• For details, see "[Protocol] (P.247)."
Printing does not start Is the specified size paper loaded? Follow the displayed message, load the correct size paper, and
although you specified then try printing again.
Tray 5 (bypass) as the
Refer
paper tray.
• For details, see "Loading Print Media in Tray 5
(Bypass) (P.69)."
The print quality is poor. An image quality problem may See "Print Quality Problems" that is described below to solve
have occurred. the problem.
Refer
• For details, see "Print Quality Problems (P.373)."
Unable to push or pull a Did you open a cover or turn off Do not forcibly push or pull the paper tray. Turn off the
paper tray. the machine during printing? machine. Turn on the machine after several seconds. When the
machine is ready to receive data, push or pull the paper tray.
The copy is not the Is the document glass or Clean the document glass or document glass cover.
desired size. document glass cover dirty?
Refer
• For details, see "Clean the Document Glass Cover,
Document Glass, Document Presser, and Narrow
Glass Strip (P.358)."
Is the document a transparency Place a document on the document glass, and then place a
film or highly translucent sheet of white paper over the document before copying.
medium?
Is the document shifted out of Load the document properly.
the correct position?
Refer
Is the document loaded properly? • For details, see "Loading a Document (P.74)."
Are the document guides of the Align the document guides properly.
Duplex Automatic Document
Refer
Feeder (DADF) misaligned?
• For details, see "Loading a Document (P.74)."
Is the document creased? Smooth out the document and load it properly.
Refer
Paper is often jammed or Is the paper loaded in the paper Load the paper properly.
wrinkled. tray properly?
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Print Media in Tray 1 and
Tray 2 (P.67)."
Is the paper tray mounted Mount the paper tray properly by inserting it securely all the
properly? way into the machine.
Refer
Tray 2 (P.67)."
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper.
Is the paper curled? Turn over the paper in the paper tray, or replace the paper with
new paper.
Are the paper and paper tray Specify the paper and paper tray according to the loaded
settings correct? paper.
Refer
Tray 2 (P.67)."
Are any shreds of paper Open the cover of the machine or pull the paper tray to
remaining or is there a foreign remove any shreds or foreign objects.
object in the machine?
Refer
• For details, see "Clearing Paper Jams (P.366)."
Is unsupported paper loaded in Replace with paper that meets machine specifications.
the paper tray?
Refer
• For details, see "Print Media Guidelines (P.63)."
Is paper exceeding the maximum Load paper in the paper tray so that it does not exceed the
fill line in the paper tray? maximum fill line.
Refer
Tray 2 (P.67)."
Are the paper guides aligned Load the paper properly, and then align the paper guides with
properly? the paper so that the paper guides contact the paper lightly.
Refer
Tray 2 (P.67)" or "Loading Print Media in Tray 5
(Bypass) (P.69)."
Is the paper finely cut out? Some paper types may not be cut out finely. Flex and fan the
paper well, and then load it again.
The document is not fed. Is the document too small? The minimum size document that can be loaded in the Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is A5 .
An error message is Check the positions of the paper Align the paper guides properly.
displayed when you load guides of Tray 5 (bypass).
Refer
paper in Tray 5 (bypass)
• For details, see "Understanding Machine Messages
and tap [Start].
(P.389)" or "Loading Print Media in Tray 5 (Bypass)
(P.69)."
372 User Guide

Documents are often Are suitable types of documents Properly load the document that is suitable to the Duplex
jammed. being used? Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
Is a special shaped document, Refer
business card, transparency film, • For details, see "Loading a Document (P.74)."
or thin document used?
Are there any sticky tags, paper Remove any sticky tags, paper clips or adhesive tape on the
clips or adhesive tape on the document before copying.
document?
Are the document guides Adjust the document guides positions.
misaligned?
Refer
Are there document shreds stuck Open the document feeder top cover of the Duplex Automatic
in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) to make sure that there are no
Document Feeder (DADF)? shreds inside.
Refer
• For details, see "Clearing Documents (P.364)."
The edge of the Is the document curled? Flatten the curl and load the document again.
document is creased.
Unable to copy in color. Is [Output Color] set to [Black & Select [Color] for [Output Color].
White]?
Refer
• For details, see "[Output Color] (P.104)."
Is the Copy Accounting feature Ask the administrator about the settings of the Copy
enabled, and is color copying Accounting feature.
restricted?
Refer
• For details, see "Setting Copying Restrictions on Each
Registered User (P.313)."
Is a message displayed on the Replace the toner cartridge of the color indicated on the
touch panel prompting you to message with a new one.
replace a toner cartridge?
Refer
• For details, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges
(P.347)."
Is a message displayed on the The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
touch panel prompting you to more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
replace a drum cartridge?
The message to change Is the toner cartridge set Reinsert the toner cartridge of the color indicated in the
the toner cartridge is not correctly? message.
cleared even after
Refer
changing the toner
cartridge.
(P.347)."
13.2.3 Print Quality Problems

If the image quality of the printout is poor, use the following list to find the most likely cause, and take the
required action.
If the problem persists after the required action is taken, contact our Customer Support Center.
Copies get stained. Is the document glass or Clean the document glass or document glass cover.
document glass cover dirty?
Refer
Is the document a transparency When copying highly translucent documents, dirt on the
film or highly translucent document glass cover shows up in the copy. Place a sheet of
medium? white paper over the document before copying.
Is the document colored or rough Adjust the copy density, or remove the background paper color
paper, or a blueprint? before copying.
Refer
• To adjust the copy density, see "[Lighten/Darken]
(P.105)", or to remove the background paper color,
see "[Background Suppression] (P.108)."
Is the document glossy printing Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass, and
paper? shadows can resemble dirt in the copy. Place a transparent
sheet such as transparency film under the document before
copying.
Black lines appear in Is the narrow glass strip of the Clean the narrow glass strip.
copies. Duplex Automatic Document
Refer
Feeder (DADF) dirty?
Copies are too dark. Is the copy density set between Adjust the copy density.
[Darken +1] and [Darken +3]?
Refer
Copies are too light. Is the document light? • For details, see "[Lighten/Darken] (P.105)."
Is the copy density set between
[Lighten +1] and [Lighten +3]?
The copy is slightly out Is the paper loaded out of Load the paper properly, and then align the paper guides with
of position. position, or is loaded with the the paper.
leading edge away from the
Refer
corners of the paper tray?
(Bypass) (P.69)."
374 User Guide

Copies are shifted Is the document loaded properly? Load the document properly.
or skewed.
Refer
Is the paper loaded in the paper Load the paper properly.
tray properly?
Refer
Tray 2 (P.67)."
If you are using Tray 5 (bypass), is Load the paper properly.
the paper loaded so that the
Refer
paper guides contact the paper?
(Bypass) (P.69)."
Are the document guides of the Load the document properly, and then align the document
Duplex Automatic Document guides with the edges of the document.
Feeder (DADF) misaligned?
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Print Media (P.67)."
Is the paper tray securely Mount the paper tray properly by inserting it securely all the
mounted? way into the machine.
Refer
Tray 2 (P.67)."
Copies have missing Is the paper damp? Damp paper creates missing parts or unclear copies. Replace
parts in them. the paper with new paper.
Is creased or wrinkled paper Remove any problematic sheets, or replace the paper with new
loaded in the paper tray? paper.
Is a cut-and-pasted or creased Cut-and-pasted or creased parts of the document may not be
document used? making proper contact with the document glass. Place a stack
of white paper on top of the document to bring it into proper
contact with the document glass.
Striped patterns appear Is the zoom ratio for the When making enlarged copies, some zoom ratio can create
in copies. document too large? striped patterns. Adjust the zoom ratio.
Refer
• For details, see "[Reduce/Enlarge] (P.105)."
Color shift occurs in color Is the calibration incorrect? Perform the calibration.
copies and image quality
Refer
is poor.
• For details, see "[Calibration] (P.261)."
Is the machine located in a place Turning on the machine or clearing the power saver mode may
receiving direct sunlight? cause a color shift when the document glass is receiving strong
light. Close the document glass cover and turn on the
machine. When the machine is ready to copy or print, turn off
the machine and then turn it on again.
The printed result is too The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new paper.
light (faded, unclear). The drum cartridge has The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
deteriorated or been damaged. more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
No toner is left in the toner Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
cartridge.
Refer
(P.347)."
Black spots appear in The drum cartridge has The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
printouts. deteriorated or been damaged. more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
Black or colored lines The drum cartridge has The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
appear in printouts. deteriorated or been damaged. more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
The narrow glass strip is dirty. Clean the narrow glass strip.
Refer
Dirt appears at regular The paper feed path gets stained. Print several sheets.
intervals in the printout. The drum cartridge has The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
Output direction
376 User Guide

White spots appear in The paper is unsuitable. Load the correct type of paper.
areas of black fill. The drum cartridge has The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
The printout comes off The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new paper.
on the fingers. The paper is unsuitable. Load the correct type of paper.
The toner is not fused to
the paper. The specified paper type does not Specify the paper type correctly.
The paper gets stained match the type of the paper
Refer
loaded in the tray.
with toner. • For details on specifying the paper type, see "Loading
Print Media (P.67)."
The entire printout is The drum cartridge has The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
black. deteriorated or been damaged. more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
A high-voltage power supply Contact our Customer Support Center.
failure may have occurred.
The printout is blank. Multiple sheets of paper are fed Flex and fan the paper well, and then load it again.
through the machine at once
(double feeding).
A power supply failure or Contact our Customer Support Center.
high-voltage power supply failure
may have occurred.
The printout contains The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new paper.
white areas, or white or The paper is unsuitable. Load the correct type of paper.
colored stripes.
The entire printout is When using Tray 5 (bypass) to Load the correct size and type paper in Tray 5 (bypass).
faint. print, the paper size specified in
Refer
the print driver does not match
the type and size of the paper
(Bypass) (P.69)."
actually loaded.
Multiple sheets of paper are fed Flex and fan the paper well, and then load it again.
through the machine at once.
The paper is wrinkled. The paper is unsuitable. Load the correct type of paper.
Paper has been added to the Replace the paper with new paper.
paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
Text is blurry. The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with new paper.
Paper has been added to the
paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
White or color patches The drum cartridge has The drum cartridge needs to be replaced with a new one. For
appear vertically. deteriorated or been damaged. more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.
No toner is left in the toner Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
cartridge.
Refer
(P.347)."
Output direction
378 User Guide

The printout is slanted. The paper guides of the paper Align the horizontal and vertical paper guides properly.
tray are not aligned properly.
Refer
(Bypass) (P.69)."
13.2.4 Copy Problems

This section describes how to solve the problems with the copy function.
Unable to copy.
The following list describes the possible solutions when you are unable to copy.

The document is not fed The document size is too small. The minimum size document that can be loaded in the Duplex
properly through the Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is A5 .
Duplex Automatic
The type of document is not The Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) does not
Document Feeder supported. support special shaped documents, business cards,
(DADF).
transparency films, or thin documents. Also, documents with
sticky notes, paper clips or adhesive tape are not supported.
Refer
The document guides are Adjust the document guides properly to match them with the
misaligned. document size.
There are document shreds stuck Open the document feeder top cover of the Duplex Automatic
in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF), and remove the shreds inside.
Refer
• For details, see "Clearing Documents (P.364)."
A document containing pages of A document containing pages of different sizes cannot be
different sizes is loaded. loaded.
Copy Output Problems.

The following list describes the possible solutions to the problems with the copy output.
Copies get stained. The document glass cover or Clean the document glass cover or document glass.
document glass is dirty.
Refer
The document is a transparency When copying highly translucent documents, dirt on the
film or highly translucent document glass cover shows up in the copy. Place a sheet of
medium. white paper over the document before copying.
Colored or rough paper, or a The background color of the document shows up in the copy.
blueprint is used as the Adjust the copy density, specify the image type, or specify the
document. background suppression feature to remove the background
paper color before copying.
Glossy printing paper is used as Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass, and
the document. shadows can resemble dirt in the copy. Place a transparent
sheet such as transparency film under the document before
copying.
Copies are too dark The specified copy density setting Adjust the copy density.
or too light. is not proper.
Refer
• For details, see "[Lighten/Darken] (P.105)."
The specified image type setting If the copy output of black text is too light, set [Original Type]
is not suitable to the document. to [Text].
Refer
• For details, see "[Original Type] (P.107)."
The color of the copy The calibration is not correct. Perform the calibration.
differs from that of the
Refer
document.
• For details, see "[Calibration] (P.261)."
The specified document type is Select the suitable document type on [Original Type].
not suitable to the document.
Refer
The specified image type setting If the copy output of black text is too light, select [Text] for
is not suitable to the document. [Original Type].
Refer
The copy is slightly out The paper in the paper tray is not Straighten the edges of the paper stack, and load it in the
of position. loaded on the correct position. paper tray, aligning the leading edge with the front corners of
the paper tray.
Copies have missing The paper is damp. Damp paper creates missing parts or unclear copies. Replace
parts in them. the paper with new paper.
Creased or wrinkled paper is Remove any problematic sheets, or replace the paper with new
loaded in the paper tray. paper.
A cut-and-pasted or creased Cut-and-pasted or creased parts of the document may not be
document is used. making proper contact with the document glass. Place a stack
of white paper on top of the document to bring it into proper
contact with the document glass.
380 User Guide

Striped patterns appear The zoom ratio for the document When making enlarged copies, some zoom ratio can create
in copies. is too large. striped patterns. Adjust the zoom ratio.
Refer
• For details, see "[Reduce/Enlarge] (P.105)."
Copies are shifted The document is not loaded Load the document properly.
or skewed. properly.
Refer
The document guides of the Load the document properly, and then align the document
Feeder (DADF) are misaligned.
The paper tray is not securely Mount the paper tray properly by inserting it securely all the
mounted. way into the machine.
The paper guides of Tray 5 Load the paper properly, and then align the paper guides with
(bypass) are misaligned. the edges of the paper.
The specified document size is Specify the document size correctly.
not correct.
Refer
• For details, see "[Original Size] (P.107)."
The specified paper size is not Specify the paper size correctly.
correct.
Refer
The copy is not the The document glass cover or Clean the document glass cover or document glass.
desired size. document glass is dirty.
Refer
The document is a transparency Place a sheet of white paper over the document before
film or highly translucent copying.
medium.
Refer
The document is shifted out of Load the document properly.
the correct position.
Refer
The document guides of the Load the document properly, and then align the document
Feeder (DADF) are misaligned.
Refer
The document is creased. Smooth out the document and load it properly.
Refer
The edges of copies are The document exceeds the Adjust the zoom ratio to reduce the copy slightly.
cut off. printable area.
13.2.5 Printing Problems

This section describes how to solve the problems with the print function.
Unable to print.
The following list describes the possible solutions when you are unable to print.

Data remains in the The machine is turned off. Turn on the machine.
printer icon.
Refer
• For details, see "Turning On/Off the Machine (P.23)."
The Ethernet cable on the Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer.
computer is disconnected.
The computer is not connected to Connect the computer to the wireless network.
the wireless network.
The cable of the machine is Connect the cable to the machine. When connecting to a
disconnected or the machine is wireless network, make sure that the Ethernet cable is
not connected to the wireless disconnected from the machine and the optional Wireless LAN
network. Kit is installed, and then connect the machine to the wireless
network.
Refer
• For details about connecting the Ethernet cable or
USB cable, see "Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet)
Network (P.25)" or "Connecting to a Computer With
USB (P.26)."
• For details about connecting to a wireless network,
see "Connecting to a Wireless Network (P.26)."
An error has occurred on the Check the error information, and take the required action.
machine.
There is a problem in the network Contact your network administrator.
connecting the computer and
machine.
The protocol to use is not Enable the protocol to use.
enabled.
Refer
• For details, see "[Protocol] (P.247)."
The machine is connected to Wait for a while and try printing again.
multiple computers.
Large amounts of A print driver of other Use the proper print driver. Make sure that the print driver for
garbled characters manufacturer's model is used. the machine is specified on the [Preferences] tab on the
(symbols) are printed. properties screen of the print driver.
Data has been sent to Paper is not loaded. Load paper.
the machine.
The specified size paper is not Load the specified size paper.
loaded.
Refer
• For details, see "Loading Print Media (P.67)."
An error has occurred on the Check the error information, and take the required action.
machine.
Job execution has been paused. On the screen, specify whether to cancel the job.
Print Output Problems

The following list describes the possible solutions to the problems with the print output.
382 User Guide

Unable to print in color. [Black and White] is selected for Select [Color] for [Output Color].
[Output Color] on the print option.
The machine is specified to print Select [ Off] for [Auto Color To Mono Print].
color jobs in black and white
Refer
forcibly.
• For details, see "Printing Color Jobs in Black and
White (P.82)."
The printout is on the The wrong size paper is loaded in Change the size of the paper loaded in the paper tray. Or
wrong paper size. the specified paper tray. change the print option to use a tray with the specified size
paper loaded.
The image at the edges The document exceeds the Enlarge the print area of the machine, or reduce that of the
of the paper is missing. printable area of the machine. document.
The settings specified in A print driver for another model is Installing the print drivers for the machine.
the print option are used.
disabled.
The optional accessory required Check the optional accessories installed on the machine, and
for the specified setting is not on the print driver, specify the configuration of the optional
installed. accessories again.
13.2.6 Fax Problems

This section describes how to solve the problems with the fax function.
Problem Action
No dial tone sounds. Make sure that the telephone line is properly connected to the machine.
Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The telephone numbers stored in the Make sure that the telephone numbers are correctly stored in the memory.
memory are not dialed correctly. Print the address book.
Documents cannot be scanned. Make sure that the document is not wrinkled and is properly loaded. Make sure
that the document is of the correct size, not too thick or thin.
Make sure that the document feeder top cover of the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF) is securely closed.
The machine does not receive faxes Make sure that the telephone line is properly connected to the machine.
automatically.
Make sure that the FAX Mode is selected.
Make sure that there is paper in the paper tray.
Check that [Fax Memory Full] is displayed on the screen.
Change the time interval shorter such as 30 seconds.
• FAX Mode
• TEL/FAX Mode
• Ans/FAX Mode
Problem Action
The machine does not send faxes. Check that the message indicating that the machine is sending a fax is displayed
on the screen.
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
Check [PB], [DP (10pps)], and [DP (20pps)] of [Dial Type].
Make sure that the document is loaded in the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) or placed on the document glass.
There may not be enough memory to store the document. Check that the
message [Fax Memory Full] is displayed on the screen, or that the status codes
017-970, 033-787, or 033-788 is recorded on the job history report.
If the message or any of the status code is found, try the following actions.
• Set the resolution to standard.
• Decrease the pages to send at a time.
• If there are any received faxes, wait until the faxes are printed.
• Wait until sending the pending fax is completed.
Make sure that the country code is set correctly. Check [Country/Region] for [Fax
Settings].
The incoming fax has blank spaces or is Check that the machine is operating properly by making a copy.
received in poor quality.
If the toner cartridge is empty, replace it with a new one.
Reduce the fax modem speed.
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
Some of the characters on an incoming The fax machine sending you the fax may have a temporary document jam.
fax are stretched.
There are lines on the documents you Check the surface of the document glass and narrow glass strip for dirt and clean
send. it.
Refer
• For details, see "Clean the Document Glass Cover, Document Glass,
Document Presser, and Narrow Glass Strip (P.358)."
The machine dials a number, but the The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer
connection with another fax machine incoming calls. Ask the operator of the remote fax machine to solve the problem.
fails.
Documents are not stored in the There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the message [Fax
memory. Memory Full] is displayed on the screen, delete any documents no longer needed
from the memory and then store the document again, or wait for the job in
progress (such as a fax transmission or reception) to complete.
Blank areas appear at the bottom of Wrong paper settings in the user option setting may be selected.
each page or on other pages, with a
Refer
small strip of text at the top.
The machine does not send or receive Check [PB], [DP (10pps)], and [DP (20pps)] of [Dial Type].
faxes.
Make sure that the cables are connected properly.
If the telephone line is connected to the machine via any device such as an
answering machine or a computer, remove the device and directly connect the
telephone line to the machine.
Make sure that the country code is set correctly. Check [Country/Region] for [Fax
Settings].
An error often occurs during a fax Press the <Home> button, and reduce the modem speed on [Device] > [General] >
transmission or reception. [Fax Settings] > [Outgoing Fax Settings] > [Modem Speed].
384 User Guide

Problem Action
The machine receives faxes but does not Check the toner level.
print them out. Make sure that the paper is loaded in the paper tray.
Make sure that [Forward Settings] is set to [Off].
Make sure that [Junk Fax Filter] is set to [Off].
Make sure that [Secure Fax Receive] is set to [Off].
Perform [Initialize NVM] > [Fax Settings].
13.2.7 Scanning Problems

This section describes how to solve the problems with the scan function.
The following list describes the possible solutions when you are unable to scan.
Problem Action
The scanner does not work. Make sure that the document to scan is properly loaded as follows.
Document glass: Facing down
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF): Facing up
There may not be enough memory to store the document to scan. Check that the
preview feature operates properly. Or lower the scan resolution rate.
Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the machine.
Check if there are any problems with the USB or Ethernet cable. If any, replace the
cable.
Make sure that the scanner is properly configured. On the software you are using,
check that the scanned data is sent to the correct port.
The machine scans very slowly. Photographic images are scanned more slowly than text when you use the Scan to
Email or Scan To Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount
of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low
resolution.
Document misfeeds or multiple feeds Make sure that the feed rollers of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
occur in the Duplex Automatic are properly attached.
Document Feeder (DADF). Make sure that the paper type of the document meets the specifications for the
machine.
Make sure that the document is loaded properly in the Duplex Automatic
Make sure that the document guides are aligned properly.
Check if the number of documents does not exceed the capacity of the Duplex
Check that the document is curled.
Flex and fan the document well, and then load it in the Duplex Automatic
Problem Action
Vertical stripes appear on the scanned Clean the narrow glass strip.
data when you scan using the Duplex
Refer
Clean the machine using the cleaning rod.
Refer
• For details, see "Cleaning Inside the Machine (P.355)."
A smear appears at the same location on Clean the document glass.
the multiple scanned data when you
Refer
scan using the document glass.
Images are skewed. Make sure that the document is loaded straight in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF) or placed on the document glass.
Diagonal stripes appear on the scanned Scan the thick document using the document glass.
data when you scan using the Duplex
Message examples that may appear on There may be a copy or print job in progress. When the job in progress is
your computer screen completed, try again.
are as follows: The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
• Device cannot be set to the H/W mode
The cable may not be properly connected or the machine may be turned off.
you want.
• Port is being used by another program. The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment is not set up
• Port is Disabled. properly.
• Scanner is busy receiving or printing Make sure that the port is properly connected and the machine is turned on. After
data. When the current job is that, restart your computer.
completed, try again.
Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the machine.
• Invalid handle.
• Scanning has failed.
The machine does not properly transfer For the Scan to Email feature, make sure that the address of the recipient is correct
scan data to a specified destination via on the Address Book or CentreWare Internet Services of the machine.
the Scan to Email or Scan to Network For the Scan to Network feature, make sure that the server address is correctly
feature. specified on the Address Book Editor.
13.2.8 Wireless Problems

Problem Action
Cannot set up wireless connection. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is disconnected from the machine.
Make sure that [Wi-Fi] is enabled.
Refer
• For details, see "[Wi-Fi] (P.243)."
The firewall on your computer may be blocking communication with your
machine. Disable the firewall on your computer.
Make sure that the access point or wireless router is supported on 802.11b/g/n at
2.4 GH.
386 User Guide

Problem Action
Unable to set up wireless connection Make sure that the security setting of the access point or wireless router is WPA or
with WPS. WPA2. WEP is not supported on WPS.
Make sure that the access from the MAC address of the machine is not restricted
on your access point or wireless router.
Refer
• For details on the operations of your access point or wireless router, see
the manual supplied with the access point or wireless router.
Unable to set up wireless connection Press the WPS button on the access point or wireless router within 2 minutes after
with WPS (push button method). starting the WPS operation on the machine.
Refer
• For details about the access point or wireless router, see the manual
supplied with the access point or wireless router.
Unable to set up wireless connection Make sure that you have entered the correct PIN on the access point or wireless
with WPS (PIN code method). router.
Refer
• For details about how to enter the PIN code, see the manual supplied with
the access point or wireless router.
The network mode of the machine Make sure that [Wi-Fi Direct] is disabled.
cannot be set to an Ad-hoc mode.
Refer
• For details about the settings, see "[Wi-Fi Direct] (P.245)."
13.2.9 Wi-Fi Direct Problems

Problem Action
The mobile device cannot discover the The machine may be connected to another mobile device via Wi-Fi Direct.
machine. Disconnect the machine and the mobile device.
Refer
• For details, see "Disconnecting the Mobile Device From the Wi-Fi Direct
Network (P.203)."
Unable to connect the mobile device When connecting with the machine using the Wi-Fi Direct function of the Android
with the machine. device, set [Group Role] on the machine to [Group Owner].
Refer
The mobile device cannot be The mobile device may be automatically reconnecting to the machine. Reset the
disconnected from the machine even passphrase for Wi-Fi Direct and disconnect the mobile device.
when the procedure in "Disconnecting
Refer
the Mobile Device From the Wi-Fi Direct
• For details, see "Resetting the Passphrase (P.204)."
Network (P.203)" has been performed.
[Wi-Fi Direct] cannot be enabled. Make sure that the network mode is set to an infrastructure mode.
Make sure that [IP Mode] is set to a mode other than [IPv6].
13.2.10 IPv6 Environment Problems
Problem Action
Unable to set an IP address for IPv6. Make sure that [Wi-Fi Direct] is disabled.
Refer
13.2.11 Scanner Driver/Software Problems

This section describes how to solve the problems with the scanner driver/software.
Problem Action
Unable to connect to the machine using Make sure that the USB cable is properly connected to the machine.
the TWAIN driver. Make sure that the machine is turned on. If the machine is turned on, once turn
off the machine, and then turn it on again to restart.
If scan software is running, close the software and restart it to try scanning again.
Unable to retrieve the address book data Make sure that the USB or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the machine.
from the machine on the Address Book For a wireless network, make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly
Editor. connected to the wireless network.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Make sure that the scanner driver is installed on your computer (The Address Book
Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the scanner driver when the machine is
connected using a USB cable.).
Scanning temporarily pauses when the Scan using the Print & Scan Hub or Web Services on Devices (WSD).
Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA)
Refer
driver is used.
• For details, see "Scanning Using Print & Scan Hub (P.152)" or "Scanning
Using Web Services on Devices (WSD) (P.154)."
When scanning from a graphic program that supports TWAIN, use the TWAIN
driver.
Refer
• For details, see "Scanning Using TWAIN Driver (P.159)."
388 User Guide

13.3 Understanding Machine Messages
When the operation finishes abnormally due to an error or when problems occur on the machine, the operator
panel displays error messages and the status codes (***-***). Solve the problems, referring to the status codes in
the following list.
Important
• When an error occurs, the information accumulated in the memory of the machine may be erased.
Note
• For status codes that are not listed in the following list, follow the instructions in each error messages displayed on the
operator panel. If you cannot solve the problem after following the descriptions in the list or the instructions displayed in
the error message on the operator panel, contact our Customer Support Center.
Status-Code What you can do

005-942 The document size was not properly detected. Load the document in the Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) again, and then tap [Start].
Note
• To place a custom size document, specify the document size on [Original Size]
Depending on the selected document size, the printout may be too large for the
paper or may have shadows at the edges.
010-397 An error has occurred in the fusing unit. Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again. If
the problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-338 Turn off the machine. Make sure that the optional Wireless LAN Kit is properly installed,
and then turn on the machine again. If the problem persists, contact our Customer
Support Center.
016-404 There is a problem with the certificate. Contact your system administrator. Tap [OK] to
016-405 start initialization.
016-503 Unable to resolve the SMTP server hostname. Make sure that the SMTP server and DNS
server are set correctly.
016-504 Unable to resolve the POP3 server hostname. Make sure that the user name and
password for the POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.
016-505 A login error has occurred when accessing a POP3 server. Make sure that the user name
and password used for POP3 server are set correctly.
016-506 The SMTP or POP3 server settings are not configured. Configure the SMTP or POP3 server
settings.
016-507 A login error has occurred when accessing an SMTP server. Make sure that the user name
and password used for the SMTP server are set correctly.
016-520 The certificate of the machine is invalid. Contact your system administrator.
016-521 The certificate of the destination client is invalid. Contact your system administrator.
016-522 Unable to acquire the SSL certificate. Contact your system administrator.
016-523 The SSL certificate data is incorrect. Contact your system administrator.
016-524 The validity period of the SSL certificate has expired. Contact your system administrator.
016-527 Contact your system administrator. If the problem persists, contact our Customer Support
Center.
016-530 An authentication error has occurred when accessing an LDAP server. Turn off the
machine, and then turn it on again. Check the access settings for the authentication
server and try again. If the problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-541 A wireless certificate of the server or client cannot be correctly referenced while using
Wireless LAN Mixed Mode Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator
to connect the machine with a wired network, and then initialize the wireless settings.
After that, import the wireless certificate, and then set Mixed Mode Enterprise or
WPA2-Enterprise again.
016-542 A server certificate error has occurred when acquiring the certificate with the operation of
Mixed Mode Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. This is a problem in the server certificate,
such as the validity period has expired for the server certificate being used with the Radius
server. Ask your system administrator to check the server certificate being used with the
Radius server.
016-543 A wireless certificate of the server or client corruption error has occurred while using the
Wireless LAN Mixed Mode Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator
to connect the machine with a wired network, and then initialize the wireless settings.
After that, import the wireless certificate, and then set Mixed Mode Enterprise or
WPA2-Enterprise again.
016-718 An error has occurred when there is insufficient memory to print. The print job is canceled.
Reduce the data size of the print job. Reduce the RAM disk size when using the RAM disk.
Refer
• For details about the RAM disk feature, see "[RAM Disk] (P.266)."
016-720 An unsupported Page Description Language (PDL) is included. Use the supported print
drivers.
Refer
• For details about how to install the print drivers, see "Installing Software for
Windows® (P.33)" and "Installing Software for Mac (P.35)."
016-737 Turn off the machine, make sure that nothing is displayed on the touch panel, and then
turn on the machine again. If the problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-741
016-742
016-743
016-744
016-745
016-757 The account is not registered. Contact your system administrator.
016-758 The function cannot be used. Contact your system administrator.
016-759 Printable page limit is exceeded. Contact your system administrator.
016-764 An error occurs when the machine is connected to the SMTP server. Check the SMTP
server settings or contact the SMTP server administrator.
016-765 The capacity of the SMTP server is not enough. Contact the SMTP server administrator.
016-766 The e-mail exceeds the SMTP server size restriction. Contact the SMTP server
administrator.
016-767 The e-mail address for the recipient is incorrect. Check the e-mail address, and then try
scanning again.
016-768 The e-mail address for the sender is incorrect. Check the e-mail address, and then try
scanning again.
016-786 A timeout error occurs when sending or receiving scanned data. Make sure that the
Ethernet cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the Ethernet cable,
contact your server administrator.
390 User Guide

016-790 Network connection error has occurred. If you use a wired LAN connection, make sure
that the Ethernet cable is connected properly.
If there is no problem with the cable, or if you use a wireless LAN connection, contact your
server administrator.
016-799 The job is invalid. Check the configuration of the machine on the print driver.
016-924 When connecting to the wireless network with the encryption type set to WEP, you
cannot configure the wireless network settings using [Quick Setup] which can be started
from the "Software/Product Manual" disc. When the encryption type of the access point
or wireless router is WEP, configure the wireless network settings on the operator panel of
the machine.
Refer
• For details about the wireless network settings, see "Manually Connecting to a
Wireless Network (P.28)."
016-985 Lower the scan resolution rate, and then try scanning again. Or change the file format of
the scanned data.
016-986
017-970 There is not enough memory to store the document. Select [Close], and try the following
actions.
• Decrease the number of pages to send at one time.
• Delete the received fax, or wait for a while until fax transmission is completed.
• If you are using the secure receiving mode, print the stored fax jobs.
Refer
• For details about the secure receiving mode, see "Using the Secure Receiving
Mode (P.168)."
027-446 IPv6 address is overlapped. Change the IPv6 address.
027-452 IPv4 address is overlapped. Change the IPv4 address.
031-521 SMB server login error. Check login-able computer with your system administrator.
031-522 SMB server login error. Check if login name (domain name and user name) and password
are correct.
031-523 Invalid SMB share name. Check the share name you specified.
031-524 Exceeded the SMB server user account limit. Check the number of users who use the
server at the same time is not exceeding the upper limit.
031-525 SMB destination client permission error. Check if the specified user can read and write
files at the storage location.
031-526 Unable to find the SMB server hostname on the network. Check DNS connection, or check
if the forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.
031-527 Unable to find the SMB server hostname on the network. Set the DNS address, or set the
forwarding destination IP address.
031-528 Unable to connect to the SMB server. Check if the machine can communicate via network
with the forwarding destination SMB server.
031-529 SMB server login error has occurred. Password is invalid. Make sure that the password is
correct.
031-530 Unable to find the SMB share folder on the specified SMB server. Check the following:
• Is the storage location correct?
• Is the file name you specified the same with the name of the file you created on the
SMB server?
• Is the DFS setting correct? Are the SMB server, share name, and storage location
directly specified according to the checked settings?
031-531 Unable to find a file or folder name on the SMB server. Check access rights to the folder
you specified.
031-532 SMB scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Change the file name or the forwarding
destination folder. Or move or delete the file in the forwarding destination folder.
031-533 Unable to write a file in the SMB server. Check if the file name you specified is not used by
other users.
031-534 Unable to create a folder on the SMB server. Check if the folder name you specified is not
used by other users.
031-535 Unable to delete a file on the SMB server. Check if another user is not operating the file.
031-536 Unable to delete a folder on the SMB server. Check if another user is not operating the
folder.
031-537 SMB server capacity exceeded. Check if the storage location has free space.
031-539 The specified SMB server is invalid. Check if the server name is correct.
031-540 The specified domain name is invalid. Check if the domain name is correct.
031-541 The specified user name is invalid. Check if the user name is correct.
031-542 Unable to initialize TCP/IP. Wait for a while and try the same operation again. If the
problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
031-543 SMB server login error. Check login permitted time with your system administrator.
031-544 SMB server login error. Password is expired. Check the password validity period with your
system administrator.
031-545 SMB server login error. Password is to be changed. Check necessity of password change
with your system administrator.
031-546 SMB server login error. Invalid user is specified. Contact your system administrator for the
destination server settings.
031-547 SMB server login error. User restricted from accessing the SMB server is specified. Contact
your system administrator for the destination server settings.
031-548 SMB server login error. Login time of SMB destination is expired. Contact your system
administrator for the destination server settings.
031-549 SMB server login error. Specified user is restricted. The password must be entered. On
server security settings, check access permission of null password user.
031-550 The APPEND command error has occurred. Check if the machine has access rights to
append data to the SMB server. Check if the server supports the APPEND command.
031-551 The RENAME command error has occurred. Check if the machine has access rights to
rename data on the SMB server. Check if the server supports the RENAME command.
031-552 Job canceled. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.
031-574 Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Check DNS connection. Or check if the
forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.
031-575 Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Sets the DNS address. Or set the address for
the forwarding destination server address as IP address.
392 User Guide

031-576 Unable to connect to the FTP server. Check if the machine communicates with
forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check if the Ethernet cable is connected,
or the IP address for the server is correct.
031-578 FTP server login error has occurred. Check if the login name (user name) and password
are correct.
031-579 Invalid FTP subdirectory path. Check if the storage location is correct.
031-580 Unable to find a file or folder name of the FTP server. Check the server access rights.
031-581 FTP scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Change the file name or the forwarding
destination folder, or move or delete the file in the forwarding destination folder.
031-582 Unable to write a file to the FTP server. Check if a file with the name you specified can be
created in the storage location, or check if the storage location has free space.
031-584 Unable to create a scan folder on the FTP server. Check if a folder with the name you
specified can be created in the storage location, or check if a folder with the same name
that you specified already exists.
031-585 Unable to delete a file on the FTP server. Check the server access rights.
031-587 Unable to delete a folder on the FTP server. Check the server access rights.
031-588 Unable to write a file to the FTP server. Check if the storage location has free space.
031-590 Job canceled. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.
031-594 The TYPE command error has occurred. Try the same operation again. If the problem
persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
031-595 The PORT command error has occurred. Try the same operation again. If the problem
persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
031-598 The APPEND command error has occurred. Check if the machine has access rights to
append data to the FTP server. Check if the server supports the APPEND command.
031-599 The PNFR command error has occurred. Check if the machine has access rights to rename
a file on the FTP server. Check if the server supports the PNFR command.
033-513 The fax communication error has occurred. Perform the following:
• Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.
• When [Secure Fax Receive] is enabled, print the stored fax job.
033-762 The machine rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
033-776 The size of the fax document data is too large and may have exceeded the space
available in memory. Lower the scan resolution rate, and then try scanning again.
Refer
• For details, see "[Resolution] (P.174)."
033-788 There is not enough memory to store the document. Select [Close], and try the following
actions.
• Decrease the number of pages to send at one time.
• Delete the received fax, or wait for a while until fax transmission is completed.
• If you are using the secure receiving mode, print the stored fax jobs.
Refer
• For details about the secure receiving mode, see "Using the Secure Receiving
Mode (P.168)."
034-515 The fax communication error has occurred. Check if the memory of the machine or the
remote fax machine is full.
034-791 Check if the telephone cable is connected properly. If the line connection is correct, check
the following:
• Is the dialing type setting correct?
Refer
• For details, see "[Dial Type] (P.241)."
If the dialing type setting is correct, check the following:
• Can the remote fax machine receive a fax?
035-701 The remote fax machine does not respond. Check the following:
• Status of the remote fax machine
• Dialing type setting
Refer
• For details, see "[Dial Type] (P.241)."
035-708 The fax communication error has occurred. Reduce the modem speed.
035-717 Refer
• For details, see "[Modem Speed] (P.242)."
035-718 The sender's fax machine does not respond. Check the status of the remote fax machine.
035-720 A fax communication error has occurred. Check the features of the remote fax machine.
035-781 Select [Close], and check if the line is busy.
042-700 The machine entered the Cooling mode because the internal temperature rose too high.
The screen with the message disappears when the internal temperature lowers. Wait for
the screen to disappear.
If the room temperature is high, it may take longer time for the machine to lower its
temperature. Lower the room temperature.
When the screen disappears, turn off the machine, and then turn it on again. If the
problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
Important
• During the Cooling mode, the fan inside the machine is working to release heat.
Do not open the front cover or turn off the machine during the Cooling mode.
042-701 The machine entered the Cooling mode because the internal temperature rose too high.
The screen with the message disappears when the internal temperature lowers. Wait for
the screen to disappear.
If the room temperature is high, it may take longer time for the machine to lower its
temperature. Lower the room temperature.
When the screen disappears, close the cover of the machine. The machine starts
automatically. If the problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
Important
• During the Cooling mode, open the cover that is displayed on the screen. Doing
so shortens the cooling time.
062-956 The document size was not properly detected. Place the document on the document
glass again, and then tap [Start].
Note
• To place a custom size document, specify the document size on [Original Size].
Depending on the selected document size, the printout may be too large for the
paper or may have shadows at the edges.
116-722 The destination computer does not respond. Make sure that the specified computer is
running, and then try scanning again.
394 User Guide

Appendix
Specifications.......................................................................................................... 396
Optional Accessories ............................................................................................ 404
About Supplies........................................................................................................ 405
Attaching/Removing the Optional Wireless LAN Kit............................... 406
"Software/Product Manual" Disc ..................................................................... 408
Resetting Defaults................................................................................................. 409
New Zealand FAX modem statements ......................................................... 411
Appendix 395
Specifications
This section lists the main specifications of the machine. Note that the specifications and the appearance of the
product may change for improvement without prior notice.
Basic Specifications/Copy Function

Type Desktop
Memory Capacity 1 GB (On board)
Colour Capability Full colour
Scan Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Printing Resolution 1200 x 2400 dpi (Text, Text & Photo, Photo)
Halftone/Printable Colours 256 levels of colour (16.7 million colours)
Warm-up Time 44 seconds or less (at room temperature 23°C)
Recovery Time (from the 26 seconds or less (at room temperature 23°C)
sleep mode)
Original Size Maximum of A3, 11 x 17", 297 x 432 mm for both sheets and books
Paper Size Max: A3, 11 x 17" (297 x 432 mm for Tray 5 (bypass))
Min: A5 (89 x 98 mm for Tray 5 (bypass))
Image loss width: 5.5 mm at lead/trail/right/left edges
Paper Weight Tray 1: 60 - 90 gsm
Tray 2 (One Tray Module): 60 - 256 gsm
Tray 5 (Bypass): 60 - 216 gsm
Important
• The use of paper recommended by Fuji Xerox is suggested. Printing may not
be performed correctly depending on the conditions.
First Copy Output Time Black & White: 8.6 seconds (A4 /Monochrome priority mode)
Colour: 10.8 seconds (A4 /Colour priority mode)
Reduce/Enlarge Size-to-Size: 1:1 ± 0.7%
Preset: 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%
Variable: 25 - 400% (1% increments)
Continuous Copy Speed A4 : Black & White: 20 sheets/minute, colour: 20 sheets/minute
A4/B4/A3/B5 /B5: Black & White: 12 sheets/minute, colour: 12
sheets/minute
Important
• The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment.
Paper Tray Capacity Standard: 250 sheets x 1 tray + Tray 5 (bypass) 98 sheets
Optional: Tray 2 (One Tray Module): 500 sheets
Max: 848 sheets (Standard + Tray 2 (One Tray Module))
Important
• When using 80 gsm paper
396 User Guide

Continuous Copy 999 sheets
Important
• The machine may pause temporarily to perform image stabilization.
Output Tray Capacity 250 sheets (A4 ), 200 sheets (A3)

Important
Power Supply AC220-240 V +/- 10 %, 5 A, 50/60 Hz common

AC110 V +/- 10 %, 10 A, 60 Hz
Maximum Power 1.1 kW (AC220 V +/- 10 %), 1.2 kW (AC240 V +/- 10 %)
Consumption Sleep Mode: 1.4 W (AC230 V), Ready Mode: 81 W (AC230 V)
Dimensions Width 595 x Depth 627 x Height 634 mm
Weight 49 kg
Important
• Excluding toner cartridges.
Space Requirement Width 974 x Depth 627 mm

Important
• When the Tray 5 (bypass) is fully extended and the document stopper of
DADF is used.
Appendix 397
Print Function
Type Built-in
Continuous Print Speed Same as the Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Important
• The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment.
Printing Resolution Standard: 1200 x 2400 dpi, High Quality: 1200 x 2400 dpi
Important
• High Quality is only for colour mode.
Page Description Language Standard:

PCL6
Optional: -
Network Protocol Ethernet (Standard): TCP/IP (lpd, IPP/IPPS, Port9100, Web Services on Devices)
Operating System Standard:
Windows® 10 (32 bit)
Windows® 8.1 (32 bit)
Windows Server® 2016 (64 bit)
Windows Server® 2012 R2 (64 bit)
macOS 10.13
macOS 10.12
OS X 10.11
OS X 10.10
OS X 10.9
OS X 10.8
Optional: -
Important
• For information about the latest supported OS, visit the Fuji Xerox web site.
Fonts Standard: 93 scalable fonts

Optional: -
Emulation Standard:
PCL5e, PDF*, TIFF*, JPEG*
*
Supported on printing from a USB flash drive (when the USB Memory Kit is
installed)
Optional: -
398 User Guide

Interface Standard: Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, USB2.0
Optional: IEEE802.11 n/g/b (2.4 GHz)
Important
• Wired LAN connection and wireless LAN connection cannot be used
simultaneously.
Scan Function
Type Colour scanner
Original Size Same as the Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Scan Speed Same as the Scan Speed for the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
Interface Ethernet 1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T, USB2.0
Scan to PC : Scan Resolution TWAIN driver
Monochrome binary / Grayscale: 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
200 x 200 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi
Full colour: 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi
Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver / Image Capture Architecture (ICA)
driver
Monochrome binary / Grayscale / Full colour: 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200
x 200 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi
Scan to PC : Driver TWAIN driver, Windows® Image Acquisition (WIA) driver, Image Capture
Architecture (ICA) driver
Scan to PC : Operating Windows® 10 (32 bit)
System Windows® 10 (64 bit)
Windows Server® 2016 (64bit)
Windows Server® 2012 R2 (64bit)
macOS 10.13
macOS 10.12
OS X 10.11
OS X 10.10
OS X 10.9
OS X 10.8
Important
Scan to PC : File Format Depends on application
Appendix 399
Scan to Network : Scan Monochrome binary / Grayscale: 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
Resolution 200 x 200 dpi
Full colour: 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
Scan to Network : Network TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)
Protocol
Scan to Network : Windows® 10 (32 bit)
Operating System Windows® 10 (64 bit)
macOS 10.13
macOS 10.12
OS X 10.11
OS X 10.10
OS X 10.9
OS X 10.8
Important
Scan to Network : File Monochrome binary: TIFF, DocuWorks documents, PDF

Format Grayscale / Full colour: TIFF, JPEG, DocuWorks documents, PDF
Scan to e-mail : Scan Monochrome binary / Grayscale: 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
Scan to e-mail : Network TCP/IP (SMTP)
Protocol
Scan to e-mail : File Format Monochrome binary : TIFF, DocuWorks documents, PDF
Grayscale / Full colour : TIFF, JPEG, DocuWorks documents, PDF
Scan to WSD : Scan Monochrome binary / Grayscale / Full colour: 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200
Resolution x 200 dpi
Scan to WSD : Network TCP/IP (WSD)
Protocol
400 User Guide

Scan to WSD : Operating Windows® 10 (32 bit)
Important
Scan to WSD : File Format Monochrome binary: TIFF, DocuWorks documents, PDF
Grayscale / Full colour: TIFF, JPEG, DocuWorks documents, PDF
Scan to USB : Scan Monochrome binary / Grayscale: 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
Scan to USB : File Format Monochrome binary : TIFF, DocuWorks documents, PDF
Grayscale / Full colour : TIFF, JPEG, DocuWorks documents, PDF
Fax Function (Optional)

Original Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Recording Paper Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: A4, 8.5 x 11" (Letter)
Transmission Time 3 seconds and more but fewer than 4 seconds
Important
• When A4 size document with approximately 700 characters is transmitted in
standard image-quality (8 x 3.85 lines/mm) and in high-speed mode
(28.8kbps or faster, JBIG). Only indicates the time for transmitting the image
information and does not include the communication control time. The total
communication time will vary depending on the contents of the document,
the type of machine receiving the fax, and line condition.
Transmission Mode ITU-T G3

Scanning Resolution Standard: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100 dpi
Fine: 8 x 7.7 lines/mm, 200 x 200 dpi
Super Fine (400 dpi): 16 x 15.4 lines/mm, 400 x 400 dpi
Coding Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Speed G3:33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24.0/21.6/19.2/16.8/14.4/12.0/9.6/
7.2/4.8/2.4 kbps
Applicable Lines Telephone subscriber line, PBX, Fax communication (PSTN), Maximum 1 port*
(G3-1 port)
*
Number of fax lines is up to one port. Port refers to number of channels for fax.
Appendix 401
Direct Fax Function (Optional)
Original Size A3, B4, A4
Resolution As same image quality indicated in Scanning Resolution for Fax Function
Transmission Speed Same as the Fax Function
Applicable Lines Same as the Fax Function
Supported Operating Windows® 10 (32bit)
macOS 10.13
macOS 10.12
OS X 10.11
OS X 10.10
OS X 10.9
OS X 10.8
Important
Duplex Function
Paper Size Same as the Basic Specifications/Copy Function
Paper Weight 60 - 169 gsm
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

Type Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Document Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: A5
Important
• Minimum for custom size: 125 x 125 mm
Paper Weight 38 - 128 gsm (in the duplex mode: 50 - 128 gsm)
402 User Guide

Capacity 110 sheets
Important
Scan Speed Copy

Black & White: 20 sheets/minute, Colour: 20 sheets/minute (A4 one sided)
Scan
Black & White: 27 sheets/minute, Colour: 27 sheets/minute
(Fuji Xerox Standard Paper (A4 ), 200 dpi, using Scan to USB Drive feature)
Important
• The scanning speed varies depending on the documents.
Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional)

Paper Size Max: A3, 11 x 17"
Min: A5
Paper Weight 60 - 256 gsm
Feeding Capacity / Number 500 sheets x 1 tray
of Tray
Important
Dimensions Width 545 x Depth 586 x Height 113 mm

Weight 11 kg
Space Requirement Width 974 x Depth 627 mm
Important
• Main unit + Tray 2 (One Tray Module)
• When Tray 5 (bypass) is fully extended and the document stopper of the
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is opened
Appendix 403
Optional Accessories
The following optional accessories can be attached to the machine. For details about how to purchase, contact
our Customer Support Center.
Product Name Description

Wireless LAN Kit Adds the function for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN.
Fax Kit Adds the fax function to the machine.
One Tray Module A tray that can hold 500 sheets of paper (When using 80 gsm paper).
USB Memory Kit Adds the front USB port for USB flash drives to the front of the machine.
When the USB port is added, the USB Direct Print and Scan to USB
features will be available.
Stand (Cabinet) A cabinet for storage. You can add it to the machine when the One Tray
Module is installed.
Tray Lock Locks the trays on the machine. You can add it to the machine when the
One Tray Module is installed.
Anti Earthquake Kit Prevents the machine from moving during an earthquake.
Note
• The optional accessories are subject to change without notice. For the latest information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
404 User Guide

About Supplies
Life of Consumables
Use of consumables/periodical replacement parts not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair machine quality
and performance. Use only consumables/periodical replacement parts recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Product Name Number of Printable Pages Product Code

Black Toner [K] Cartridge Approximately 9,000 pages CT203020
Cyan Toner [C] Cartridge Approximately 3,000 pages CT203021
Magenta Toner [M] Cartridge Approximately 3,000 pages CT203022
Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge Approximately 3,000 pages CT203023
Black Toner [K] Cartridge (High Capacity) Approximately 12,500 pages CT203024
Cyan Toner [C] Cartridge (High Capacity) Approximately 14,000 pages CT203025
Magenta Toner [M] Cartridge (High Capacity) Approximately 14,000 pages CT203026
Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge (High Capacity) Approximately 14,000 pages CT203027
Waste Toner Container [R5] Approximately 15,000 pages CWAA0869
Drum Cartridge CMYK Approximately 68,200 pages CT351053
Note
• Depending on your contract, the toner to order may vary. For more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative or sales representative.
• The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is an estimate and
varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area coverage), paper size, paper type,
copy/print density, output image type, and the machine operating environment.
Collection and Recycling of Consumables

For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges or waste
toner containers and drum cartridges to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy recovery. Proper disposal
is required for toner cartridges, waste toner containers, and drum cartridges no longer needed. Do not open
toner cartridges, waste toner containers, and drum cartridges. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
Appendix 405
Attaching/Removing the Optional
Wireless LAN Kit
Attaching the Optional Wireless LAN Kit
1. Turn off the machine.
Refer
• For details about how to turn off the machine, see "Turning Off the Machine (P.23)."
2. Push the lever to the left to remove the cover of the optional Wireless LAN Kit socket.
3. Insert the connector of the optional Wireless LAN Kit into the optional Wireless LAN Kit socket.
406 User Guide

Removing the Optional Wireless LAN Kit
1. Turn off the machine.
Refer
• For details about how to turn off the machine, see "Turning Off the Machine (P.23)."
2. Push the lever, and pull out the optional Wireless LAN Kit.
3. Attach the cover of the optional Wireless LAN Kit socket.
Appendix 407
"Software/Product Manual" Disc
The "Software/Product Manual" disc includes the manuals and software such as the print drivers/scanner
drivers/utilities.
The "Software/Product Manual" disc includes the following software.
Operating Driver/Software Overview/How to Install

System
Windows PCL Driver Refer
• "Installing With [Quick Setup] (P.34)"
• "Installing With [Custom Installation] (P.35)"
XML Paper Specification (XPS) Extract the contents of the zip file stored in the following folder
Driver to a desired location, and then use the inf file in the extracted
folder to install the driver by following the procedure for the OS
you are using.
"Software/Product Manual" disc > Software > XPS >
i386_amd64 > (language folder to be used)
Note
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
Scanner Driver (for USB Refer

connection) • "Installing With [Quick Setup] (P.34)"
Print & Scan Hub Refer

• "Installing With [Quick Setup] (P.34)"
• "Using Software Supplied With the Machine (P.274)"
Address Book Editor Refer

ContentsBridge Utility Refer

Mac Print Driver Refer

• "Installing Software for Mac (P.35)"
Address Book Editor Refer

Fax Driver Refer

Scanner Driver Refer

408 User Guide

Resetting Defaults
The machine can be reset to the factory default setting by initialization.
The following menu parameters are not reset:
• Authentication setting of the machine administrator
• [Login Attempts] setting
• [Service Lock] setting
• [Secure Fax Receive] setting
• [Print Accounting] setting
• [Copy Accounting] setting
• Enable/disable setting in [USB Port Settings]
• [User Authentication] setting
To reset the machine, perform the following procedure.
 Initializing [Fax Settings]/[Scan Settings]/[User Account Settings]/[User App

Settings]/[System Settings]/[Address Book]
2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Maintenance] > [Initialize NVM].

4. Tap the item to initialize.
Refer
• For details on the item to initialize, see "[Initialize NVM] (P.261)."
5. Tap [Start].
 Initializing Wireless or Wired Network Settings
2. Tap [Device].
3. Tap [Network Settings].
Appendix 409
4. To initialize the wireless network settings, tap [Wi-Fi] > [Reset Wi-Fi Settings].
To initialize the wired network settings, tap [Other] > [Reset Network Settings].
5. Tap [Start].
410 User Guide

New Zealand FAX modem statements
General
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item
complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom,
nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects
with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is
compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.
This equipment does not fully meet Telecom’s impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur when used in
conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such
circumstances.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom ‘111’ Emergency Service.
If a charge for local calls is unacceptable, the ‘Dial’ button should NOT be used for local calls. Only the 7-digits of the local
number should be dialed from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area code digit or the ‘0’ prefix.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another equipment connected to the same line.
Important Notice
Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not dependent
on local power, is available for emergency use.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC)
associated with this equipment. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for
compliance with Telecom’s Specification:
a) There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single
manual call initiation, and the equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the
end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt.
b) Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall go on-line for a period of not less than
5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt.
c) The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing.
All persons using this equipment for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires
that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated
in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the
purpose for its collection, how it is used and what is disclosed to any other party.
Appendix 411
DocuCentre SC2022
User Guide ME8229E2-3 (Edition 1)
July 2018
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright© 2018 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

Docucentre Sc2022: User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Docucentre Sc2022: User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Docucentre Sc2022: User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DocuCentre SC2022

2 Setting Up the Machine..................................................................................... 22

3 Using Your Machine ............................................................................................ 46

7 Faxing (Optional) ...............................................................................................161

8 Using the Cloud Service Hub ..........................................................................179

9 Printing and Scanning From Smartphones or Tablets ...........................200

10 Changing the Machine Settings....................................................................214

11 Making Better Use of Your Machine............................................................270

1.1 Types of Manuals .....................................................................................................11

1.1.2 Manuals Included With Optional Accessories

Indicates important information you have to know or be reminded before

Indicates supplemental information useful for operations.

Indicates reference sections or documents.

" " • A cross-reference included in this manual.

– Orientation of documents or paper is described in this manual as follows:

LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Feed direction Feed direction

Customizing the Home Screen

Copying Both Sides of an ID Card ([ID Card Copy]) P.110

Sending a Fax From a Windows® Computer (Direct Fax) P.176

Printing Faxes Received Using the Secure Receiving Mode P.168

Printing From Smartphones or Tablets P.201

1 Document Glass Cover 7 Tray 2 (One Tray Module) (Optional)

1 USB Port 4 Wall Jack Connector

1 Toner Cartridges 3 Waste Toner Container

1 Document Feeder Top Cover 5 Document Stopper

1.4.3 Operator Panel

1 Touch Panel Configures the settings by directly tapping the screen.

WARNING: Punch Paper.

Do not touch. Load Paper Face-up.

CAUTION: Pinch Point Maximum Fill Line

Standby Button Add Paper.

Home Button Push down Bottom Plate.

NFC Point Paper Jam

Do not copy money. Do not remove forcefully.

Do not use paper with staples or clips attached. Ethernet

Do not use folded, creased or torn paper. USB

Do not use inkjet paper. Phone connector

Do not use postcards. Line connector

Do not use lightweight originals. Toner

Do not use creased or folded originals. Remove

Do not use originals with excessive curl. Lock

Do not use carbon paper originals. Unlock

Do not use envelopes.

2.1 Turning On/Off the Machine................................................................................23

2.1.2 Turning Off the Machine

1. Press the <Power> button.

2. Tap [Power Off] on the touch panel.

2 Setting Up the Machine 23

Wired LAN or USB connection

"Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network (P.25)"

"Attaching the Optional Wireless LAN Kit (P.406)"

"Installing Software for Windows® (P.33)"

2.2.2 Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network

2. Set the IP address for the machine.

2 Setting Up the Machine 25

Next, install software.

2.2.4 Connecting to a Wireless Network